Pilot's Guide KMD-250

N
B KMD 250
Multi-Function Display/GPS
Pilot’s Guide
Covered by US Pat. 6512975
WARNING
The enclosed technical data is eligible for export under License Designation NLR
and is to be used solely by the individual/organization to whom it is addressed.
Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
Copyright © 2003-2005 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without the
express written permission of Honeywell International Inc. is prohibited. For fur-
ther information contact the Manager, Technical Publications; Honeywell; One
Technology Center; 23500 West 105th Street; Olathe, Kansas 66061.
Telephone: (913) 712-0400.
KMD 250 Multi-Function Display
and
KMD 250 Multi-Function Display with GPS
Software Version 01/08 or later

REV Hist 4/29/04 1:31 PM Page 1
Revision History and Instructions
Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide
Revision 0, November 2003
Part Number 006-18281-0000
Summary
This is the original release of this publication.
R-1
Revision 1, November 2003
Part Number 006-18281-0000
Summary
Change in text on Startup Caution Page.
R-2
Revision 2, April 2004
Part Number 006-18281-0000
Summary
Added:
Internal GPS
Flight planning capability
Nearest function
User Waypoints
Direct-To function
Quick Tuning capability
Airspace Alerting
Airspace depiction
Waypoint Alerting
Turn Anticipation
R-3
Revision 3, December 2005
Part Number 006-18281-0000
Summary
S/W 01/08: Added Airport Type on Airport Info Screen on page 1-25
Added TIS patent statement on inside front cover.
Changed Awareness to Avoidance on page 1-1.
Changed 100L to 100LL on page 1-27.
Added Definition for Heading on TIS screen on page 3-12.
Corrections to Index pages I-1 and I-12.
R-4
toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page i
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
BASIC KMD 250 OPERATION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
FUNCTION SELECT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
RANGE KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
DIRECT-TO/NRST (NEAREST) KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
JOYSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
ROTARY KNOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
STORMSCOPE® OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
DEMO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
FUNCTION STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
STARTUP DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
POP-UP HELP DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
POWER DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
DATA FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
GREAT CIRCLE COURSES AND MAGNETIC VARIATION . . . . . . . . .1-13
MINIMUM ENROUTE SAFE ALTITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
INTERNAL GPS STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
QUICKTUNE™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
MAP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
SELECTING A MAP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
VFR Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
IFR Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Relative Terrain Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Baro Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
OBSTACLE LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Rev 2 Apr/2004 i KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page ii
Table of Contents
USING THE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Map Data Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Airport Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Navaid Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Airspace Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Airspace Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Display Flight Plan Data on Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Temporarily Decluttering the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Find Nearest (Units Without Internal GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Find Nearest (Units With Internal GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Waypoint Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Turn Anticipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
USER WAYPOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
ENTERING A USER WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
ENTERING A USER AIRPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
EDITING A USER WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52
DELETING A USER WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53
DIRECT-TO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
DIRECT-TO A DATABASE OR STORED WAYPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
DIRECT-TO USING THE JOYSTICK POINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56
OBS COURSE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56
FLIGHT PLAN OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
VIEWING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
VIEWING FLIGHT PLAN DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60
Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61
Changing the Data Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62
ACTIVATING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64
EDITING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66
Deleting a Waypoint in the Stored Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66
Inserting a Waypoint in the Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67
Rev 2 Apr/2004 ii
KMD 250 Pilot's Guide
toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page iii
Table of Contents
Changing the Name of the Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-69

Deleting a Stored Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71
USING DIRECT-TO IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72
Proceeding Direct-To an Active Flight Plan Waypoint . . . . . . . . . .1-72
Manually Selecting an Active Flight Plan Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
Deleting a Direct-To Within the Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-74
USING OBS COURSE MODE IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . . .1-75
Setting an OBS Course to an Active Flight Plan Waypoint . . . . . .1-75
Deleting an OBS Course Within the Active Flight Plan . . . . . . . . .1-77
TRIP PLANNING USING PRESENT POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78
SYSTEM SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81
MAP SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81
NAVIGATION SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-84
DEMO MODE & SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-86
Demo Mode for Non-GPS Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-87
Demo Mode for GPS Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88
Changing Demo Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88
SOFTWARE VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89
DATABASE VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90
MAP DISPLAY ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-91
DATACARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-95
DATA AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-95
INSERTING A NEW DATACARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-96
TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN DATACARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-97
Store Current User Data on Another Datacard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-97
Retrieve User Data from Another Datacard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-98
DATABASE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-100
DATABASE CYCLE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-100
Rev 2 Apr/2004 iii

toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page iv
Table of Contents
SECTION 2
FIS OPERATION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
CONCEPT OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
FIS Function Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
BASIC WEATHER PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
METAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
SPECI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
TAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
PIREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
AIRMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
CONVECTIVE SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
ALERT WEATHER WATCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
VALUE ADDED SERVICE WEATHER PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
NEXRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
NEXRAD Abnormalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
NEXRAD Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
GRAPHICAL METAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
GRAPHICAL AIRMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
GRAPHICAL SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
GRAPHICAL ALERT WEATHER WATCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
FIS SUBSCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
SETTING UP A FIS SUBSCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
CHECKING FIS SUBSCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
NEXRAD PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Rev 2 Apr/2004 iv
toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page v
Table of Contents
NEXRAD Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Using the NEXRAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Graphical METARs Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Using the Graphical METARs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Graphical AIRMETs Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Using the Graphical AIRMETs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Graphical SIGMETs Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Using the Graphical SIGMETs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Graphical Convective SIGMETs Page Operational Controls . . . . .2-39
Using the Graphical Convective SIGMETs Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
GRAPHICAL WEATHER WATCHES PAGE (AWW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Graphical Weather Watches Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . .2-42
Using the Graphical Weather Watches Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
FIS NETWORK STATUS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
FIS Network Status Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Using the FIS Network Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
FIS TEXTUAL WEATHER PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
FIS Textual Products Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Using the FIS Text Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Changing Weather Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Changing Filter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
FIS NOTIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
(GRAPHICAL PRODUCT) DATA HAS NOT BEEN RECEIVED . . . . . . .2-57
NO METARS AVAILABLE IN SELECTED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
NO METARS AVAILABLE, DATA NOT RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
INVALID SUBSCRIPTION CODE, PLEASE CHECK AND RE-ENTER CODE . .2-58
Rev 2 Apr/2004 v
toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page vi
Table of Contents
UNDERSTANDING AVIATION WEATHER REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

UNDERSTANDING METARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
UNDERSTANDING TAFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
UNDERSTANDING PIREPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
UNDERSTANDING AIRMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
UNDERSTANDING SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
UNDERSTANDING CONVECTIVE SIGMETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
UNDERSTANDING ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (AWW) . . . . . . . . .2-72
SECTION 3
TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE OPERATION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
TRAFFIC FUNCTION STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
TAS/TCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
TAS/TCAS NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
OPERATIONAL CONTROLS FOR TAS/TCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
TAS/TCAS SYMBOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Non-Threat Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Proximity Intruder Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Traffic Advisory (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Resolution Advisory (RA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
“Off Scale” Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
“No Bearing” Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
TA/RA WHILE IN MAP OR WEATHER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
AUTO-POP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A DATA FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
TAS/TCAS SYSTEM FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
NO DATA RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
SYSTEM TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Rev 2 Apr/2004 vi
toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page vii
Table of Contents
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

TIS LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
TIS NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
TIS OPERATIONAL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
TIS SYMBOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Proximity Intruder Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Proximity Intruder Non-Altitude Reporting (NAR) Traffic . . . . .3-14
Traffic Advisory (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Traffic Advisory Non-Altitude Reporting (NAR) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
“Off Scale” Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
TRAFFIC ADVISORY WHILE IN MAP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
AUTO-POP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A DATA FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
COAST MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
TIS SYSTEM FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
No Data Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Transponder Not Reporting Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
SECTION 4
WX-500 STORMSCOPE® OPERATION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
STORMSCOPE® FUNCTIONS STATUS ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
HEADING STABILIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
CLEAR ALL DISCHARGE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
SWITCH BETWEEN WEATHER VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Rev 2 Apr/2004 vii

toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page viii
Table of Contents
SWITCH BETWEEN DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Cell Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Strike Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
CHANGING DISPLAY RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
OPERATION IN STORMSCOPE® MODE WITH FLIGHT PLAN . . . . . .4-5
OPERATION IN MAP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
SECTION 5
SYSTEM MESSAGES
VIEWING SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
APPENDIX A
DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2
APPENDIX B
COMMON WEATHER ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
APPENDIX C
GPS Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
GPS POSITION DETERMINING CONCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
GPS DATA SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
GPS SYSTEM SEGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Rev 2 Apr/2004 viii

toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page ix
Table of Contents
APPENDIX D
NAVIGATION TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1
Rev 2 Apr/2004 ix
toc 4/29/04 1:33 PM Page x
Table of Contents
Intentionally left blank
Rev 2 Apr/2004 x
Introduction
SECTION 1
Basic Operation
BASIC KMD 250 OPERATION
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
All of us at Honeywell congratulate you on choosing this product. You
are now the owner of one of the most sophisticated yet simple-to-use
multifunction displays available today. We understand you probably
can’t wait to see it in action but before you try to use it do please take
the time to read through this manual and understand its many interesting
and useful features. Time spent in familiarizing yourself with your new
KMD 250 unit will be more than repaid by trouble-free operation later,
and more importantly safe and accurate navigation.
We have made the operation of this unit as intuitive as possible through
the use of Softkeys, menus, and on-screen help, thus reducing pilots’
dependence on the manual. You should very quickly find that handling it
efficiently and expertly becomes second nature to you. Don’t be afraid
to experiment.
We thank you for your decision to purchase a KMD 250 and wish you
many happy and safe hours flying.
The KMD 250 MFD is a panel mounted Multi-Function Display system
that is available with an optional internal VFR GPS navigator. The KMD
250 is a component of the Bendix/King Integrated Hazard Avoidance
System (IHAS) family of products that are designed to improve the pilot's
ability to manage four major safety hazards: situational awareness
(moving maps), weather, traffic, and terrain avoidance.
The KMD 250 features a 3.8 inch diagonal color LCD display. It includes
a high capacity data card for storing Jeppesen aviation data as well as
cartographic map data including terrain elevation, roads, lakes, rivers,
railroads, obstacles, political boundaries, cities, and urban areas. The
card is updated on a 28 day cycle. Application software is also included
on this card.
The KMD 250 is available in two versions. One version has an internal
GPS and the other requires GPS information from an external source,
such as the KLN 94. The internal GPS is certified only for VFR opera-
tions. The functions of both versions will be discussed in this pilot’s
guide. Functions that are related to the use of the optional internal GPS
are marked with this symbol.
The KMD 250 performs the following functions:
• Configurable Moving Map Display with aeronautical and carto-
graphic database
Rev 3 Dec/2005 1-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-2
Introduction
• User Entered Waypoints
• Flight Planning and Direct-To
Basic Operation
Section 1
• Terrain awareness display (Terrain color coded by relative altitude)

• FIS weather data display and overlays
• TCAS/TAS/TIS traffic display and overlay
• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® display and overlay
This Pilot’s Guide is divided into five sections and four appendices. Each
section addresses a specific function as follows:
Section 1 Basic KMD 250 Explains the use of the Map Display, Flight Planning,
Operation Joystick, Functions Keys, Softkeys and Rotary Knob.
Section 2 FIS Operation Explains the operation of the Flight Information
Services weather products.
Section 3 Traffic Avoidance Explains operation of TCAS I, TCAS II and TIS sys-
System Operation tems as they pertain to the KMD 250. Refer to the
TCAS I or TCAS II user’s manual for more informa-
tion.
Section 4 WX-500 Stormscope® Explains operation of the Stormscope® as it pertains
Operation to the KMD 250. Refer to the Stormscope® user’s
manual for more information.
Section 5 System Messages Explains accessing and the meaning of system mes-
sages that may be presented by the various systems.
Appendix A Definitions, Acronyms, Explains various terms and abbreviations.
Abbreviations
Appendix B Common Weather Explains weather abbreviations commonly seen in
Abbreviations aviation weather reports.
Appendix C GPS Primer An overview of how GPS works.
Appendix D Navigation Terms Definitions and examples of common navigation

terms.
Rev 2 Apr/2004 1-2 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-3
General Information
GENERAL INFORMATION
Basic Operation
This portion of the manual provides an overview of the user interface
Section 1
controls and display presentation of the KMD 250 Multifunction Display.
This manual also provides an explanation of each of the individual dis-
plays that the KMD 250 unit presents.
The operating system of the Bendix/King KMD 250 keeps to a minimum
the number of key presses necessary to activate the various functions,
especially those most frequently used in the air. The provision of a joy-
stick makes it considerably easier to operate the unit and allows for fast
and efficient access to most functions.
3 4 5
6
7
8
2
12 9
1
10
11
1. On/Off/Brightness Control
2. Function Select Keys
3. Display
4. Softkeys
5. Data Card
6. Menu Key
7. Range Up Key
8. Range Down Key
9. Direct-To Key
NRST (Nearest) Key
10. Joystick
11. Rotary Knob
12. Softkey Labels

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-4
General Information
FUNCTION SELECT KEYS
Basic Operation
These keys are used to select available data sources (as indicated on
Section 1
the key) for display on the LCD. Pressing the same Function Select Key
multiple times will sequence through the available pages associated with
that function. The following diagram shows the available pages under
each function. Note that not all pages will be available in all installations.
MAP FPL WX TRFC
VFR Map Active FIS Graphical

(Absolute Flightplan TAS/TCAS/TIS
Products
Terrain)
Flightplan FIS Textual
IFR Map Index Products
(No
Terrain)
Stormscope®
Relative
Terrain Map
MENU KEY
Displays the available Softkey options for the currently selected function.
RANGE KEYS
RNG∆- Pressing this key will increase the range scale one level on the
displayed page. Range scales on other pages will not be affected.
RNG∇- Pressing this key will decrease the range scale one level on the
displayed page. Range scales on other pages will not be affected.
DIRECT-TO/NRST (NEAREST) KEY
The Direct-To Key (D) is found on units containing the optional

internal VFR GPS navigator. When pressed the Direct-To function is ini-
tiated. Direct-To will only function when the internal GPS is selected as
the current navigation source.
The NRST (Nearest) Key is found on units without the internal GPS
option. When pressed the Find Nearest Window will be displayed.
SOFTKEYS
When active, the description indicated in the label describes the key’s
present function related to the displayed page. Whenever a new option
is selected, a new display is shown along with its new key labels. This

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-5
General Information
capability of displaying operations that are only applicable to a particular
screen is referred to as ‘Soft Keying’, and allows one key to perform mul-
Basic Operation
tiple functions without the complications of multiple key presses on a
conventional keypad.
Section 1
JOYSTICK
This is a pointing device which moves a mouse-like pointer around the

display. It is primarily used for pointing at items on the map for further
information and for measuring range and bearing to specific points. It is
also used to move through menu lists.
ROTARY KNOB
The Rotary Knob, located in the lower right of the unit, has various func-
tions as indicated by a soft label when active. It is also used to move
through menu lists and change data within data fields.
STORMSCOPE® OPTION
The KMD 250 has the ability to interface and control an L-3 WX-500
Stormscope® ‘black box’ thunderstorm sensor. When the Stormscope®
interface is on and the overlay is enabled, lightning icons will also appear
on the display.
DEMO MODE
The Demo Mode can be used to practice using the KMD 250. This will
allow you to utilize it to the maximum extent.
When the KMD 250 is in the Demo Mode, it performs as if it is receiving
adequate sensor signals to use the various functions. See DEMO
MODE & SETUP later in this section.
FUNCTION STATUS ICONS
The Function Status Icons are used to show the current status of Traffic
Avoidance, Flight Information Services Weather Products and WX-500
Stormscope® functions. These icons are displayed in the lower left of
the screen. If a function is not enabled, or is not installed, that function’s
icon will not be displayed.
In general, if a Status Icon has a gray background the function is not
being displayed on the current display. This may be due to the setting
on the Map Setup Overlays Group Page. If the map display range is
beyond that set on the Map Setup Overlays Group Page, then the Status

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-6
General Information
Icon background will be gray because that function will not be displayed
at that range setting.
Basic Operation
If a Status Icon has a light blue (cyan) background the function is cur-
Section 1
rently being displayed. This does not necessarily mean that data is vis-
ible because there may be nothing to view.
For example, if traffic icons are set to display at 30nm on the Map Setup
Overlays Group Page and the VFR Map range is increased to beyond
30nm, then traffic will no longer be overlayed on the VFR Map display
and the traffic Status Icon background will change from light blue to gray.
The following table illustrates the Function Status Icons and their mean-
ings in more detail.

General Information
STARTUP DISPLAYS
Basic Operation
At power-up, the startup logo displays will be seen.
Section 1
If Stormscope® is installed with the
system, a display similar to the one
at the right will be seen.
After the completion of the Self Test,

press the OK Softkey.
One of the following Instrument Panel Self Test Pages will be displayed
depending on whether the unit is equipped with an internal GPS or is the
non-GPS version.
Non-GPS KMD 250 KMD 250 with Internal GPS
Rev 3 Aug/2005 1-7 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

General Information
Verify that the Message and Waypoint Alert annunciator lamps are on.
These annunciators are external to the KMD 250, mounted elsewhere
Basic Operation
on the instrument panel as shown

here represented as MSG and
Section 1
WPT. However, they are optional

and may not be installed. Verify
the GPS ALTITUDE (BARO ALTI-
TUDE will be displayed if the Typical External Annunciator Unit
system is configured to use a baro-
metric altitude source) is consistent with the altimeter. If the KMD 250 is
configured to use the optional internal GPS as “sole source” or “backup”
verify the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) is showing half scale right
deflection with a FROM indication. If all is correct after verification, press
the OK Softkey.
One of the following caution screens will now be displayed depending on
whether the unit is the non-GPS version or the unit is equipped with the
internal GPS . Acknowledge by pressing the OK Softkey.
Non-GPS KMD 250 KMD 250 with Internal GPS
Acknowledge the next caution page

by pressing the OK Softkey.
The KMD 250 is now ready for use

and will be showing the VFR Map
Display.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-9
General Information
POP-UP HELP DISPLAYS
Basic Operation
Pop-up status displays are shown
Section 1
if a Function Select Key is pressed
and held for longer than 2 seconds.
These can help provide a refer-
ence for monitoring the status of
selected functions. The first
example is a MAP Function Select
Key pop-up. Second is the pop-
up displayed when pressing and Map Display Pop-Up Help
holding the WX Function Select
Key.
Weather Display Pop-Up Help
POWER DOWN
When power is turned off a display
similar to that shown here will be
seen. The system will shut down
in 5 seconds. This allows for inad-
vertently turning off the system.
Push the ON/OFF/Brightness
Control back in before the count-
down is over and the system will
continue where it left off with no
loss of data.
Power Down Display
DATA FIELDS
Data Fields may be used to display various types of information in win-

dows on the left side of the screen, as shown here. This makes it easy
to get quick access to desired information.
The Data Fields can be turned on or off and customized separately in
each of the MAP, WX or TRFC Displays. The system will remember the
last selected parameters in each function display and will maintain this
configuration until changed.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-10
Basic Operation General Information

Section 1
Map Display-Data Fields On Map Display-Data Fields Off
Each field can be customized to display any of the following:
ALT Altitude
BRG Bearing to Waypoint
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
DIS Distance to Waypoint
DEP TIME Departure Time
DTK Desired Track
ESA En Route Safe Altitude
ETA WPT Estimated Time of Arrival at Waypoint
ETE WPT Estimated Time Enroute to Waypoint
FLT TIME Flight Time
GNDSPD Ground Speed
HEADING Heading
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
NEAR POS Near Position Display
PPOS Present Position
TIME Time
TKE Track Angle Error
TRFC Traffic
TRK Actual Track
WPT Active Waypoint
XTK Cross Track Error
NOTE: Some fields may not have valid data depending on the installa-
tion.
The CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) Display has scaling of 5nm, 1nm
and .3nm depending on the setting on the Navigation Setup Page (see
Navigation Setup in this section).

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-11
General Information
The Near Position (NEAR POS) display is intended to provide an easy
method of reporting aircraft position to Air Traffic Control. This is done
Basic Operation
by always displaying the nearest reporting position to the aircraft’s pre-
sent position in the Data Field. The position criteria can be set to display
Section 1
the nearest VORs, VORs plus airports or all data (airports, VORs,
VOR/DME, VORTAC, NDB, VRP). Settings are made on the Navigation
Setup Page discussed later in this section.
To turn the Data Fields on or off,
perform the follow steps:
1. Press the MENU Key to dis-
play Figure 1-1.
2. Press the CHANGE FIELDS
Softkey to display Figure 1-2. If
the Data Fields were on to begin
with, a FIELDS OFF Softkey will
be available. If the Data Fields
were off, a FIELDS ON Softkey will
Figure 1-1
be available. Pressing this Softkey
will toggle the Data Fields on and
off.
3. When finished press the
DONE Softkey.
To change Data Fields, perform
the follow steps:
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 above.
With the Data Fields turned on,
use the Joystick to select the
Figure 1-2
desired Data Field as shown in
Figure 1-3. In this case the top
Data Field is selected and displays
BRG as indicated in the list.
2. When the desired Data Field is
selected, use the Rotary Knob to
select data from the list to be dis-
played in that Data Field.
These settings will be maintained
until changed by the user.
3. When finished press the DONE Figure 1-3
Softkey.
Pressing the RESTORE DEFAULT Softkey will reset the Data Fields
back to the factory settings.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-12
General Information
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
Basic Operation
A Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

Section 1
graphically displays left and right

deviation from a desired course. A
CDI can be displayed in any of the
Data Fields as shown in Figure 1-
4. The CDI’s vertical bar operates
like a navigation deviation needle
on a conventional CDI or HSI
using VOR/Localizer navigation.
An on-course indication is dis-
played when the vertical deviation
bar is centered on the triangle in the Figure 1-4
middle of the CDI. In enroute use,
CNU
each dot represents one nautical
mile deviation from the desired
track (full scale deviation is ± 5
NM). Different CDI scales can be
set on the Navigation Setup Page.
A vertical deviation bar positioned
two dots to the right of the center
triangle indicates the aircraft is two
nautical miles to the left of course
as shown in Figure 1-5. The center
2 NM
triangle also serves as the CDI’s

TO/FROM indicator and operates
in the same manner as a conven- TUL
tional CDI TO/FROM indicator; a
triangle pointing up indicates “to” Figure 1-5
the active waypoint while a “down” triangle
(Figure 1-6) indicates “from” the active waypoint.
The word FLAG is displayed over the CDI when
the CDI is not usable for navigation as seen in
Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-13
General Information
GREAT CIRCLE COURSES AND MAGNETIC VARIATION
Basic Operation
Due to “great circle” courses and magnetic variation differences between
Section 1
present position and the active waypoint, the To bearing and From radial
may not be exactly 180° different from each other. This condition is
most likely to occur when long distances are involved, and/or you are
operating in very northerly or southerly latitudes.
N N
72°
KPHX
269°
Figure 1-8
See Figure 1-8 for an example depicting a case like this. The aircraft is
somewhere over Georgia, and the active waypoint is KPHX. The bearing
to steer is 269°, and radial is 72°. Generally, bearing (not radial) will be
used when long distances are involved.
MINIMUM AND ENROUTE SAFE ALTITUDE
The Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA) displayed is the altitude defined by

Jeppesen as “Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude (Grid MORA)”. This alti-
tude is derived by Jeppesen for sectors which are one degree of latitude
by one degree of longitude in size. One degree of latitude is 60 nautical
miles. One degree of longitude is 60 nautical miles at the equator and
progressively less than 60 nautical miles as one travels away from the
equator. One degree of longitude is approximately 50 nautical miles at
the southern most parts of the U.S. and is approximately 40 nautical
miles at the northern most parts of the U.S. The MSA altitude informa-
tion is contained in the database and is updated when the datacard is
updated.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-14
General Information
The MSA provides “reference point” clearance within these one degree
latitude by one degree longitude sectors. Jeppesen defines a reference
Basic Operation
point as “a natural (Peak, Knoll, Hill, etc.) or man-made (Tower, Stack,

Tank, Building, etc.) object”. Jeppesen states the following about the
Section 1
Grid Minimum Off-Route altitude: “Grid MORA values clear all reference
points by 1000 feet in areas where the highest reference points are 5000
feet MSL or lower. MORA values clear all reference points by 2000 feet
in areas where the highest reference points are 5001 feet MSL or
higher”. The KMD 250 displays dashes for areas outside the database
coverage area or for areas where the Grid MORA is not defined.
The Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA) is the highest MSA sector altitude from
the present position to the active waypoint, then to the destination way-
point along the active flight plan. See Figure 1-9. When the KMD 250 is
in the OBS Course Mode, the minimum en route safe altitude is the
highest MSA sector altitude from the present position to the active way-
point.
ESA (MSL)
MSA (MSL)
1°
LA
T.
1° LONG.
Figure 1-9
CAUTION
The MSA and ESA altitudes displayed are advisory only. They
should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and ter-
rain avoidance information. Refer to current aeronautical charts for
appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-15
General Information
INTERNAL GPS STATUS
Basic Operation
For an overview on how the
Section 1
Global Positioning System works,
refer to Appendix C, GPS Primer.
Such parameters as present posi-
tion, altitude, date, time, satellite
state, DOP, satellites tracked,
signal strength and elevation for
the internal GPS can be monitored
on the Internal GPS Status Page.
To access this page perform the Figure 1-10
following:
play Figure 1-10.
2. Press the AUX MENU Softkey
to display Figure 1-11.
3. Using the Rotary Knob or the
Joystick to select Internal GPS
Status as shown in Figure 1-11.
4. Press the SELECT Softkey to
display Figure 1-12. Figure 1-11
5. Press the RCVR INFO

Softkey to view information such
as the GPS receiver software part
number, software version, soft-
ware revision and serial number
as shown in Figure 1-13.
QUICKTUNE™ Figure 1-12
The KMD 250 is capable of tuning

the KX 155A/165A Nav/Comm.
The KMD 250 is capable of tuning
up to four Nav/Comm systems,
depending on the installation. Use
of this feature will be discussed
later in Map Operation and Flight
Planning.
Figure 1-13

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-16
Basic Operation General Information

Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-17
Map Operation
MAP OPERATION
Basic Operation
The following illustration describes the data that appears on the Map
Section 1
Display.
3 4 5
7
2
8
9
11 10
1 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and
displayed as well as sensor status.
2 Data Fields - These can be turned on or off. Each of the 5 windows can
be set to display one of the following; ALT, BRG, CDI, DIS, DEP TIME, DTK,
ESA, ETA WPT, ETE WPT, FLT TIME, GNDSPD, HEADING, MSA, NEAR
POS, PPOS, TIME, TKE, TRFC, TRK, WPT, XTK.
3 North Pointer
4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when heading
or track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading or track.
5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is one
half the selected range.
6 RESET STICK Soft Label
7 Traffic Symbol Overlay - Displayed when traffic avoidance system is installed.
8 Graphical METAR Icon Overlay - Displayed when FIS is installed and
subscription is valid.
9 LEGEND Soft Label
10 Current MAP Selection - VFR MAP (absolute altitude terrain shading), IFR
MAP (no terrain shading) or Relative Terrain Map (relative altitude terrain
shading).
11 Display Range - RNG:####.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-18
Map Operation
SELECTING A MAP DISPLAY
Basic Operation
Press the MAP Function Select Key to sequence through the VFR Map,
Section 1
IFR Map and Relative Terrain Map Display. With the IFR Map displayed,
no topographic data is displayed. With the Relative Terrain Map dis-
played, topographic data is displayed as colors corresponding to eleva-
tion relative to the aircraft’s present altitude. See Tables 1-1 and 1-2 on
Absolute and Relative Altitudes.
VFR Map
IFR Map
☞
Relative Terrain
Map
VFR MAP
With the VFR Map displayed,

topographic data is displayed
as colors corresponding to the
absolute altitude stored in the
database (see Figure 1-14).
The VFR Map displays terrain
similar to a VFR sectional
chart. Table 1-1 shows the
levels and terrain shading used Figure 1-14 - VFR Map
on the VFR Map.
A color key can be displayed
by moving the Joystick Pointer
pressing the LEGEND Softkey
as shown in Figure 1-15. To
exit, press the CLEAR Softkey
then press the RESET STICK
Softkey.
Figure 1-15
Absolute Terrain Color Key

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-19
Map Operation
Absolute Terrain Altitude (feet) Color
13000+ Dark Brown
Basic Operation
11500-12999 ⇓
Section 1
10000-11499 ⇓
9000-9999 ⇓
8000-8999 ⇓
7000-7999 Light Brown
6000-6999 Dark Tan
5000-5999 ⇓
4000-4999 ⇓
3000-3999 ⇓
2500-2999 ⇓
2000-2499 Light Tan
1500-1999 Dark Green
1000-1499 ⇓
500-999 ⇓
<499 Light Green
Water Blue
Table 1-1 Absolute Terrain (VFR Map)
IFR MAP
Terrain is not displayed on the

IFR Map display as shown in
Figure 1-16. In addition, all
built up or urban areas are
shaded light gray. Oceans,
rivers and lakes are blue.
RELATIVE TERRAIN MAP

Figure 1-16 - IFR Map
With Relative Terrain Map dis-
played, topographic data and
obstructions are displayed as
colors corresponding to eleva-
tion relative to the aircraft’s
present altitude as shown in
Figure 1-17. This feature is
useful in providing awareness
to possible terrain hazards at
the present aircraft altitude.
Table 1-2 shows the levels and
terrain shading used on the
Relative Terrain Map. Figure 1-17 - Relative Terrain Map

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-20
Map Operation
Aircraft Altitude Relative to Aircraft Altitude Relative to
Color
Terrain (feet) Obstacle (feet)
Basic Operation
250 ft. or more below sur-

250 ft. or less above obstacle
Section 1
rounding terrain
Between 249 ft. below & 250 Between 251 ft. & 750 ft.
ft. above surrounding terrain above obstacle
Between 251 ft. & 750 ft. Between 751 ft. & 1250 ft.
above surrounding terrain above obstacle
2001 ft. or more above sur- 2001 ft. or more above
100% Black
rounding terrain obstacle
Table 1-2 Relative Terrain and Obstacles (Relative Terrain Map)
Figure 1-18 Figure 1-19

Relative Terrain Color Key Relative Obstacle Color Key
A color key can be displayed by
moving the Joystick Pointer and
pressing the LEGEND Softkey.
Notice there are two legends when
viewing the Relative Terrain Map
Display. The first page shows the
color key for terrain (Figure 1-18)
and the second (Figure 1-19)
shows the color key for obstacles.
The airplane icon conveys what
colors would be below current air-
craft altitude and what would be Figure 1-20
above. The airplane icon itself,
however, does not represent current aircraft altitude. Press the NEXT
and PREV Softkeys to toggle between the two displays. To exit, press
the CLEAR Softkey then press the RESET STICK Softkey.
Figure 1-20 depicts obstacles displayed on the Relative Terrain Map.
Note the differences in color between terrain and obstacles based on an
aircraft altitude of 2,000 ft MSL. Obstacles are enhanced on the Relative

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-21
Map Operation
Terrain display to provide situational awareness by displaying a 1/2 nm
ring around the obstacle. For example, the obstacles displayed with a
Basic Operation
red ring, as shown in Figure 1-20, are easily identifiable and are within
250 ft. of the present aircraft altitude.
Section 1
NOTE: The color scale for obstacles is more severe than terrain so that
they stand out on the map.
CAUTION
NEVER USE THE TOPOGRAPHIC ELEVATION DISPLAYED ON
THIS EQUIPMENT AS YOUR SOLE REFERENCE FOR TERRAIN
AVOIDANCE.
The KMD 250 must be receiving altitude information from an altitude
source for the Relative Terrain Map to function. Altitude sources may be
GPS altitude, pressure altitude (ARINC 429 or Gillham) or baro-cor-
rected altitude. The altitude
source options are determined
at installation. If no altitude
information is received a cau-
tion will be displayed as in
Figure 1-21.
NOTE: If a baro-corrected or
pressure altitude source is
used, the Relative Terrain Map
may not display colors accu-
rately in operations above
18,000 feet when the altimeter Figure 1-21
setting is 29.92 in. Hg.
Baro Correction
If the altitude information
source is Gillham pressure alti-
tude, then a baro correction
must be entered manually. If
the baro correction is not kept
current the Relative Terrain
Map will not display the proper
color coding for the aircraft’s
actual altitude.
When on the Relative Terrain Figure 1-22
Map the KMD 250 will prompt for an entry every 30 minutes as shown in
Figure 1-22. Turn the Rotary Knob to enter the desired barometric set-
ting. After the desired setting is entered, press the OK Softkey.
NOTE: The manual baro correction entry must be kept current on both
the KMD 250 and the altimeter for the Relative Terrain Map to function
properly.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-22
Map Operation
The baro correction may also
be entered through the AUX
Basic Operation
MENU as follows:
Section 1
1. Press the MENU Key to

display the Menu Softkeys as
in Figure 1-23.
2. Press the AUX MENU
Softkey to display Figure 1-24.
Use the Joystick to select Baro
Entry as shown.
Figure 1-23
3. Press the SELECT
Softkey and Figure 1-25 will be
displayed.
4. Turn the Rotary Knob to
select the desired entry.
5. Press the OK Softkey.
OBSTACLE LABELS
Obstacles are labeled with two Figure 1-24

numbers. The first number is
the height of the obstacle in
FEET ABOVE MSL. The
second number (in brackets) is
the height of the obstacle in
FEET AGL.
Figure 1-25

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-23
Map Operation
USING THE MAP
Basic Operation
After power-up, the map will
Section 1
initially be displayed at a range
setting of 20nm.
If there is no valid GPS or FMS
position fix data available, the
words CAUTION, No position
data will be shown across the
center of the display in a box
as seen in Figure 1-26. If the Figure 1-26
fix is lost at any time during
normal operation of the unit, the same CAUTION, No position data box
will be overlayed on the map.
CAUTION: Do not use the map for navigation while this notification
is displayed.
The map will be shown in either North Up, Track Up or Heading Up
orientation depending upon the setting selected in the Map Setup and is
reflected by the North Pointer in the upper left of the display.
The displayed data is updated every second. Press the
RNG ∆ (range up) or RNG ∇ (range down) key at any time
to zoom the map in and out to whichever one of the twelve
pre-set scales desired. The available range settings are 1,
2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500 and
1000 nm. The levels of detail appearing at each zoom
level can be changed in the Map Setup menu. See Map
Setup.
When active, Auto Zoom automatically adjusts the range setting up or
down as needed to keep the flight plan active waypoint within the view-
able area of the Map display.
Auto Zoom is enabled in either of the following ways:
1. Pressing RNG ∇ past the
minimum setting of 1 nm.
2. Pressing and holding
either RNG Key for 2 seconds
or more. While Auto Zoom is
enabled, AUTO is displayed in
light blue text above the current
range setting (see Figure 1-
27).
Auto Zoom will be canceled if
the flight plan becomes invalid
Figure 1-27
or either RNG Key is pressed.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-24
Map Operation
MAP DATA
INTERROGATION
Basic Operation
Section 1
As soon as the joystick is

moved, a display similar to
Figure 1-28 will be displayed.
The map freezes in its present
position with respect to the
joystick pointer (inset). The
reason the map is made to
stop moving is that this makes
accurate positioning of the joy- Figure 1-28
stick pointer much easier.
The aircraft icon will still be
displayed in the proper loca-
tion and will move in relation
to the stationary map.
The latitude and longitude of
the pointer position is dis-
played at the bottom of the
display. The bearing (PBRG)
and distance (PDIS) are also
displayed. These show the
distance and bearing from the
aircraft present position to the Figure 1-29
joystick pointer. This function
can be used to measure dis-
tance and bearing to any point
on the map. The window
formed by the extremities of
the display can be moved
(panned) around the map by
"bumping" the display borders
left, right, up or down with the
pointer. The RNG ∆ and RNG
∇ keys can still be used to
zoom the map in and out. Figure 1-30
Press RESET STICK and the
joystick pointer will vanish, the display will return to the moving map,
and the map will be placed back in its present position at the zoom
level that was selected prior to activating the joystick. If the joystick is
not moved for 30 seconds, the display will time-out back to the moving
map.
In addition to finding it useful for measuring distances and bearings,
the joystick can be used for other tasks. By placing the pointer over
any data icon a window will pop up similar to that shown in Figure 1-
29. Pressing the MORE INFO Softkey, a display similar to Figure 1-30
will appear.
Map Operation
Press the CLEAR Softkey to return to the map display.
Basic Operation
If the FIS INFO Softkey is pressed, the textual METAR page will be
displayed for the closest reporting station to the current selection.
Section 1
AIRPORT INFORMATION
As shown in Figure 1-31, you

can display airport information
by placing the joystick pointer
over an airport icon. Pressing
the MORE INFO Softkey will
display more detailed runway
information as shown in
Figure 1-32. The RNG Keys
can be used to zoom in or out
on the airport diagram. The
information given here is
derived from the database. Figure 1-31
The airport type is shown to
the right of the airport identifier
(KOSH). The airport type is
either MILITARY, PRIVATE
or blank for others (public).
The airport elevation (808ft) is
shown to the right of the airpo-
rt type. Runway orientation
and lengths are displayed to
the right of the airport dia-
gram. Runway surfaces are
shown as an H for hard and
an S for soft. Lighting is Figure 1-32
shown as an L for lit and a U
for unlit.
Pressing the NEXT Softkey
will display more details like
radio frequencies and ser-
vices, similar to Figure 1-33.
In the window with the airport
identifier, airport airspace
information and approach
types will be shown. The next
window to the right shows the
difference between UTC and
local standard and daylight Figure 1-33
times. The next window will display the available fuel types at this air-
port. See Figure 1-35 for details regarding these fields.

Map Operation
If the FIS INFO Softkey is pressed, the textual METAR page will be dis-
played with the current METAR report (if available) for this airport or
Basic Operation
the nearest report to the airport.

Section 1
Pressing the QUICK TUNE

Softkey will tune the appro-
priate KX 155A/165A
Nav/Comm to the selected
frequency. Use the Joystick
or Rotary Knob to place the
cursor over the desired fre-
quency in the list. If the
system contains only one KX
155A/165A, simply pressing
the QUICK TUNE Softkey will
tune the Nav/Comm to the Figure 1-34
selected frequency. If multiple
KX 155A/165A systems are contained in the installation, pressing the
QUICK TUNE Softkey will display the Nav or Comm selection display
as shown in Figure 1-34. Use the Joystick or Rotary Knob to select the
desired Nav or Comm for tuning. Press the OK Softkey to tune the
radio.

Map Operation
Basic Operation
1 6
3
Section 1
4
7
5
8
1 Airport ICAO Identifier
2 Airspace Enviroment - The following may be displayed in this field:
CL B Class B airspace
CL C Class C airspace
CTA Control Area
TMA Terminal Area
TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area
3 Non GPS Approach Availability - The following may be displayed in this
field:
NO APR No approaches are available
NP APR Non-precision approach available
MLS MLS approach available
ILS ILS approach available
ILS/MLS ILS and MLS approaches available
4 GPS Approach Availability - If an approved non-precision GPS approach
is available GPS will be displayed.
5 Comm Frequency List - Lists the available communications frequencies for
the airport being displayed. See Appendix A for abbreviations.
6 Fuel Availability - The following fuel types may be displayed:
80 80 to 87 octane
100 100 to 130 octane
100LL 100 octane, low lead
JET Jet fuel, any type
AUTO Automotive fuel (also known as MOGAS)
7 Time Zone - Displays the difference between local standard time and UTC
for the selected airport. The difference in local daylight time and UTC is in
parenthesis.
8 Radar Indicator - If (R) is displayed, this indicates an approach/departure
radar environment.
Figure 1-35 Airport Info Field Definitions
NAVAID INFORMATION
As explained previously, you

can access additional Navaid
information by placing the joy-
stick pointer over a VOR or
NDB icon to display informa-
tion similar to Figure 1-35.
Pressing the MORE INFO
Softkey will display more infor-
mation as in Figure 1-36. Full
details of the Navaid are listed,
Figure 1-36
Rev 3 Dec/2005 1-27 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Map Operation
type, frequency and ident as
shown in Figure 1-37.
Basic Operation
As discussed previously in
Section 1
Airport Information, pressing

tune the appropriate KX
155A/165A Nav/Comm to the
navaid frequency. If the
tune the Nav radio. If multiple Figure 1-37
KX 155A/165A systems are
contained in the installation,
pressing the QUICK TUNE
Softkey will display the Nav
selection display as shown in
Figure 1-38. Use the Joystick
or Rotary Knob to select the
desired Nav or Comm for
tuning. Press the OK Softkey
to tune the radio.
AIRSPACE
INTERROGATION Figure 1-38
In order to interrogate a piece

of airspace on the Map display,
move the joystick pointer to
one of the airspace boundaries
to display an information
window as shown in Figure 1-
39.
IMPORTANT:
When a single airspace
boundary line is shared by Figure 1-39
two different pieces of air-
space (which is very common), the airspace with the lower vertical
limit will always be highlighted.
Once it is determined the piece of airspace highlighted is the piece for
which information is wanted (you may have to zoom out to verify this, but
beware, some airspace switches off as you zoom out dependent on the
settings made in Map Setup), press the MORE INFO Softkey and addi-
tional information will be displayed as in Figure 1-40.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-29
Map Operation
The information shown on this
display is all the information
Basic Operation
from the internal database that
is relevant to the airspace
Section 1
selected. If some of the fields
are blank or say SEE CHART,
this means that Jeppesen data
is not available for that partic-
ular item.
As discussed previously,
pressing the QUICK TUNE
Softkey will tune the appro- Figure 1-40
priate KX 155A/165A
Nav/Comm to the selected
frequency. Use the Joystick
cursor over the desired fre-
quency in the list. If the
tune the Comm to the
selected frequency. If mul-
tiple KX 155A/165A systems
are contained in the installa- Figure 1-41
tion, pressing the QUICK
TUNE Softkey will display the Comm selection display as shown in
Figure 1-35. Use the Joystick or Rotary Knob to select the desired
Comm for tuning. Press the OK Softkey to tune the radio.
AIRSPACE ALERTING
The Special Use Airspace (SUA) alert feature is three dimensional. The
SUA areas are stored in the KMD 250 database with regard to altitude
when the actual SUA altitude limitations are charted in terms of mean
sea level (MSL). However, if the actual lower limit of an SUA is charted
in terms of an altitude above ground level (AGL), then it is stored in the
database as all altitude below the upper limit of the SUA. If the actual
upper limit of an SUA is charted in terms of AGL, it is stored in the data-
base as “unlimited”.
If the altitude input to the KMD 250 is pressure altitude from an altitude
encoder or air data computer, then you must manually update the KMD
250 with an altimeter setting (Baro Correction) in order to receive accu-
rate SUA alerting. See the discussion on Baro Correction earlier in this
section. It is a good idea to update the Baro Correction each time you
make a change to the aircraft’s altimeter setting.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-30
Map Operation
NOTE: If there is no altitude input to the KMD 250, all altitudes will be
regarded as being within the boundary of the SUA area.
Basic Operation
Section 1
The message prompt for a special use airspace alert will occur when the
aircraft’s position is at a point such that a projection of the aircraft’s
existing track over the ground is approximately 10 minutes from pene-
trating the outer boundary of one of these areas. It will also occur if the
aircraft is within approxi-
mately two nautical miles of
one of these areas even if
the aircraft’s projected track
over the ground won’t actu-
ally penetrate the SUA area 10 MIN
(see Figure 1-42). If one of 2 MILES
the SUA areas is penetrated,

another message will state:
Inside SUA.
The SUA alert feature may
be disabled (or enabled) on
the Navigation Setup Page.
See Navigation Setup later
in this section. Figure 1-42
If the SUA alert feature has been enabled, the KMD 250 allows selection
of a vertical buffer on the in order to provide an additional layer of protec-
tion from inadvertently entering an SUA. The vertical buffer serves to
“stretch” the SUA area in both directions (up and down) by the selected
buffer altitude. For example, a buffer of 1,000 feet is selected and the
actual SUA area exists from 5,000 feet MSL to 12,000 feet MSL. In this
case SUA alert messages are displayed if the aircraft enters the lateral
boundary at any altitude between 4,000 and 13,000 feet MSL.
CAUTION
It is the pilot’s responsibility to avoid special use airspace where
ATC clearance to penetrate is required but has not been obtained.
The airspace alert is only a tool to assist the pilot and should never
be relied upon as the sole means of avoiding these areas.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-31
Map Operation
When SUA Alerting is enabled,
an Airspace Alert message will
Basic Operation
be provided when the aircraft
is approximately 10 minutes or
Section 1
2 miles (depending on ground
speed) from entering the air-
space boundary. When an
Airspace Alert message is
given, MESSAGE PRESS
MENU will flash at the bottom
of the display as shown in
Figure 1-43.
Figure 1-43
Pressing the MENU Key will
display the message as shown
in Figure 1-44. Press the OK
Softkey to exit the message.
To enable or disable SUA
Alerting perform the following:
1. Press the MENU Key.
Press the AUX MENU Softkey
2. Use the Rotary Knob or
the Joystick to place the cursor Figure 1-44
over Navigation Setup as
Figure 1-45

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-32
Map Operation
3. Press the SELECT
Softkey to display Figure 1-46.
Basic Operation
4. Press the NEXT Softkey to

Section 1
display Figure 1-47.

5. Use the Joystick to place
the cursor in the selection field
for SUA Alerting.
6. Use the Rotary Knob to
select On or Off.
7. When On is selected the Figure 1-46
SUA Alerting Buffer will be
editable. Use the Joystick to
place the cursor over this field
(see Figure 1-48) and use the
Rotary Knob to select the
desired altitude. An Airspace
Alert message will be given
when the aircraft enters within
this selected buffer altitude
from the published SUA alti-
tude boundary. For example: if
the published upper SUA
boundary is 3,000 feet and a Figure 1-47
buffer altitude of 1,000 feet is
selected, the Airspace Alert will
be issued when the aircraft
descends to 4,000 feet and is
within the lateral SUA bound-
aries.
Figure 1-48

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-33
Map Operation
DISPLAY FLIGHT PLAN
DATA ON MAP
Basic Operation
Section 1
If a host GPS is outputting data
in the Bendix/King equivalent
ARNAV R-30 (RS232) data
sentence format, in LEG mode,
the active flight plan will be
sent to the KMD 250 and is
displayed as an overlay on the
map as shown in Figure 1-49.
Figure 1-49
If a KLN 94 is supplying the
GPS data, and the KLN 94 is
configured to produce the
“Enhanced RS-232 GPS bus”,
the KMD 250 will display the
curved paths including DME
arcs, Procedure Turns and
Holding Patterns. Figure 1-50
shows an example.
If another type of GPS is used,
then during the curved flight
segments of approaches (i.e.
DME arcs, procedural turns Figure 1-50
and holds) most GPS units
stop outputting flight plan data but continue to output positional data.
During a DME arc or procedural turn, the KMD 250 will continue to show
position, track and ground speed but the curved line depicting the arc or
turn will not be displayed. In OBS mode, some GPS units will not be
able to provide flight plan data. Present position is still provided and
flight plans will be displayed as soon as the mode is returned to LEG.
CAUTION
In the case of DME arcs, turns and holds, some GPS units send the
flight plan information as if there was no arc or curved flight path.
Therefore the KMD 250 has no option but to connect the beginning
and end waypoints of the arc or curve with a straight line. Under
these circumstances the line on the KMD 250 MUST BE IGNORED.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-34
Map Operation
TEMPORARILY DECLUT-
TERING THE MAP
Basic Operation
Section 1
Sometimes it is necessary to
temporarily reduce the amount
of data displayed on the map in
order to make it more readable.
This is known as decluttering.
Perform the following steps
until the desired level declut-
tering is achieved.
Figure 1-51
display the DECLUTTER
Softkey as shown in Figure 1-
51.
2. Press the DECLUTTER
Softkey. On the first press the
land data will be removed from
the display as seen in Figure 1-
52. Notice roads, railways, city
icons, etc. are no longer dis-
played. Note also that a -L is
now shown in the bottom left of
the screen indicating the dis- Figure 1-52
play is minus land data.
Softkey again. On the second
press the aeronautical data will
be removed from the display
as seen in Figure 1-53. Notice
airports, airspace boundaries,
etc. are no longer displayed.
Note also that a -A is now
added in the bottom left of the
screen indicating the display is
also minus aeronautical data in
addition to land data. Figure 1-53

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-35
Map Operation
Softkey again. The third press
Basic Operation
will now restore the land data
as seen in Figure 1-54. Note
Section 1
that the -L is no longer shown
in the bottom left of the screen
indicating land data is now
being displayed.
Softkey again. The fourth
press will now restore the
aeronautical data. Figure 1-54
When leaving the Map display to view another function, all data will be
restored.
FIND NEAREST (UNITS WITHOUT INTERNAL GPS)
Find Nearest allows the user to find the airport, VOR, NDB, intersection
or user entered waypoint closest to the aircraft’s present position. Up to
20 of the find criteria may be listed and must be within 200nm of the air-
craft’s position. The closest will be listed first, the furthest listed last.
1. Press the NRST Key to
display the FIND NEAREST
display as shown in Figure 1-
55. In this case a list of air-
ports is displayed.
2. If more information on a
particular airport is desired, use
the Joystick or Rotary Knob to
place the cursor over the
desired airport identifier and
press the MORE INFO Figure 1-55
Softkey. Information on the
selected airport will be dis-
played as in Figure 1-56.
Press the NEXT Softkey to dis-
play more information. Press
the CLEAR Softkey to return to
the FIND NEAREST display.
Figure 1-56

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-36
Map Operation
3. To change to one of the
other Find parameters, press
Basic Operation
the NEAREST TYPE Softkey

to display the SELECT
Section 1
NEAREST TYPE window as

4. Use the Joystick or Rotary
Knob to place the cursor over
the desired Find type.
Figure 1-57
6. If Airports is selected as
the type (as in Figure 1-57),
pressing the AIRPORT
FILTER Softkey (Figure 1-58)
will display the AIRPORT
FILTER CRITERIA Window
7. The listed airports can be
filtered by runway length and
runway type. Use the Joystick
to place the cursor over the
desired field and use the
Rotary Knob select the the Figure 1-58
desired value. When finished
press the OK Softkey.
Figure 1-59

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-37
Map Operations
FIND NEAREST (UNITS
WITH INTERNAL GPS)
Basic Operation
Section 1
As discussed previously, Find
Nearest allows the user to find
the airport, VOR, NDB, inter-
section or user entered way-
point closest to the aircraft’s
present position. Up to 20 of
the find criteria may be listed
and must be within 200nm of
the aircraft’s position. The Figure 1-60
closest will be listed first, the
furthest listed last.
1. Press the Direct-To (D)
Key to display the DIRECT TO
window. If the KMD 250 is not
presently navigating using the
internal GPS, but is displaying
information coming from an
external GPS source, Figure 1-
60 will be displayed. This is a
prompt to indicate the Direct-
To function is not available
Figure 1-61
when using an external GPS
source. However, this will not
affect the Find Nearest feature.
Press the OK Softkey to dis-
play the FIND NEAREST dis-
play. The Find Nearest feature
is now used as discussed pre-
viously.
If the KMD 250 is presently
navigating using the internal
GPS, Figure 1-60 will not be
displayed and Figure 1-61 will
be shown immediately upon Figure 1-62
pressing the Direct-To Key.
2. Press the NEAREST Softkey to go to the FIND NEAREST display
as shown in Figure 1-62. The balance of the Find Nearest feature func-
tions as discussed previously.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-38
Map Operation
WAYPOINT ALERT
Basic Operation
The Waypoint Alert will flash

Section 1
the next desired track (NEXT

DTK) when the estimated time
to the next waypoint is about
15 seconds as shown in Figure
1-63. Turning to establish the
NEXT DTK will aid in inter-
cepting the next leg of the flight
plan.
Figure 1-63
If the waypoint is being dis-
played in a Data Field the WPT field will flash annunciating the Waypoint
Alert.
When viewing the Flight Plan Page the arrow indicating the current leg
will flash to annunciate the Waypoint Alert.
If an external Waypoint Alert annunciator is installed in the aircraft, it will
also flash.
TURN ANTICIPATION
When Turn Anticipation is

enabled in Navigation Setup, it
will provide turn guidance to a
new course for intercepting the
next leg of the flight plan.
Waypoint Alerting will begin
when the estimated time to the
start of the turn is about 20
seconds. As previously dis- Figure 1-64
cussed, the Waypoint Alert will
be annunciated by flashing the
next desired track (NEXT
DTK) window as in Figure 1-
64. When the computed turn
point is reached TURN TO will
displayed as shown in Figure
1-65. The required bank angle
to follow the arc will normally
be between 3° and 25°
depending on aircraft speed
and the amount of course
change.
Figure 1-65

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-39
Map Operation
Turn Anticipation will be inhibited if the angle between the legs is less
than 5° or greater than 175° or the Crosstrack Error (XTK) is greater than
Basic Operation
4 nm.
Section 1
To utilize the Turn Anticipation feature, start the turn transition to the next
leg in the flight plan at the very beginning of the computed turn point.
Upon reaching this computed turn point the Waypoint Alert annunciator
will stop flashing and remain on steadily while the text “TURN TO” is dis-
played as shown in Figure 1-65.
If an autopilot is engaged, this is the time to change the selected course
on the CDI or HSI to that indicated next to TURN TO. In the case of
Figure 1-65 that would be 288° magnetic.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-40
Basic Operation Map Operation

Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-41
User Waypoints
USER WAYPOINTS
Basic Operation
User waypoints can be entered as either user defined waypoints or as
Section 1
airports. The KMD 250 allows for the programming of up to 1,000 user
waypoints. User waypoints are stored on the KMD 250 data card and
can be transferred to a new data card when installed.
These waypoints can be used for flight plans if the KMD 250 contains the
optional internal GPS, but only if the internal GPS is currently being used
for navigation. Flight plans running on an external GPS cannot utilize
waypoints stored in the KMD 250.
KMD 250 systems that do not have the internal GPS also allow user
waypoints to entered, but can only be used for marking points on the
map for such things as points of interest, landing locations not contained
in the database, etc.
ENTERING A USER WAYPOINT
The following illustration describes the User Waypoint Edit display.
9
1
8
2
3
4
5 6 7
1 Waypoint Identifier - The system default will initially be USR000 and will increment with
each entered waypoint up to USR999. Any combination of alphanumeric characters
(up to six places) may be entered in place of the default.
2 1st Remarks Field - The default entry is current date. This field may be cleared and any
combination of up to 24 alphanumeric and punctuation characters may entered.
3 2nd Remarks Field - The default entry is current time. This field may be cleared and any
combination of up to 24 alphanumeric and punctuation characters may entered.
4 Waypoint Latitude/Longitude - Initially, the aircraft position at the time this display was
selected is entered here. This field may be changed to place the waypoint at different
location.
5 Place - A new waypoint is initially placed at the present position. An airport or navaid
identifier can also be entered to define the waypoint position as a bearing and distance from
the airport or navaid.
6 Bearing - Can indicate bearing from the current aircraft position to the waypoint, or
a bearing may be entered to define a waypoint position relative to an airport or navaid.
7 Distance - Can indicate distance from the current aircraft position to the waypoint,
or distance may be entered to define a waypoint position relative to an airport or navaid.
8 Waypoint Icon - Waypoint symbol that will be displayed on the map.
9 Waypoint Type - This field may be changed to indicate Waypoint or Airport depending
on the desired waypoint definition.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-42
User Waypoints
The following is a procedure
for entering new User
Basic Operation
Waypoints.
Section 1

display Figure 1-66. Press the
AUX MENU Softkey to display
cursor over User Waypoints
as seen in Figure 1-67.
2. Press the SELECT Figure 1-66
Softkey to display the USER
WAYPOINT LIST display as
shown in Figure 1-68. Initially,
the list will be empty. As way-
points are entered the list will
be populated.
Figure 1-67
Figure 1-68

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-43
User Waypoints
3. Press the NEW WPT
Basic Operation
WAYPOINT EDIT display as
Section 1
The system default waypoint
identifier will be a naming con-
vention as shown in the IDENT
field. The default identifier will
increment starting with
USR000. The user can also
enter any identifier desired, but
limited to any combination of Figure 1-69
six alphanumeric characters. If
the default identifier is accept-
able, proceed to step 5.
4. To enter a waypoint identi-
fier other than the system
default, turn the Rotary Knob
one increment and the first
character will be highlighted as
in Figure 1-70. If the desired
identifier is less than six char-
acters, press the CLEAR
IDENT Softkey to clear the Figure 1-70
IDENT field. Otherwise, turn
the Rotary Knob to enter the
desired first character. Use the
Joystick to go to the next field
and again use the Rotary Knob
to enter the next desired char-
acter and so on until complete.
5. The current date and time
default to the two fields under
the waypoint identifier.
Remarks regarding the way-
point can be entered in these
fields in place of the date and Figure 1-71
time.
If remarks are desired, use the Joystick to place the cursor on the first
line containing the date as shown in Figure 1-71.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-44
User Waypoints
6. Turn the Rotary Knob one
increment to highlight the first
Basic Operation
character on the line as in

Figure 1-72.
Section 1
7. Press the CLEAR TEXT

Softkey to clear the field as
enter the desired alphanumeric
or punctuation character.
Figure 1-72
9. Use the Joystick to move
the cursor to the next field.
Turn the Rotary Knob to enter
the desired character.
Continue in this manner to
enter any combination of
alphanumeric and punctuation
characters up to 24 characters
in length.
10. If a second line of remarks
is desired, use the Joystick as
discussed previously to place
the cursor over the second line. Figure 1-73
Turn the Rotary Knob one
increment. Press the CLEAR
TEXT Softkey. Repeat steps 7
and 8 until all the desired char-
acters are entered (see Figure
1-74).
11. The default waypoint
POSITION is the aircraft posi-
tion at the time the USER
WAYPOINT EDIT display was
selected. The latitude and
longitude of the waypoint is dis-
played. As the aircraft con- Figure 1-74
tinues moving, the Present
Position is indicating the current bearing and distance to the waypoint
position. Note that these are changing as the aircraft moves.
12. A waypoint can be entered for any position. This can be done in two
ways. One way is by entering the desired latitude and longitude of the
waypoint. This is done by using the Joystick to place cursor over the
latitude/longitude field as shown in Figure 1-74. Turn the Rotary Knob
one increment to place the cursor on the first character. Continue
turning the Rotary Knob to enter an N or S. Use the Joystick to move

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-45
User Waypoints
the cursor to the next field.
Again, use the Rotary Knob to
Basic Operation
enter the desired number.
Repeat using the Joystick and
Section 1
the Rotary Knob until the
desired latitude/longitude is
entered.
13. The second way to enter
the position of a waypoint is by
entering the bearing and dis-
tance from a known position,
such as an airport or navaid. Figure 1-75
This is done by first using the
Joystick to place the cursor
over Present Position as
shown in Figure 1-75. Turn the
Rotary Knob one increment to
display the WAYPOINT
ENTRY window as shown in
Figure 1-76.
14. Use a combination of the
Joystick and Rotary Knob as
previously discussed to enter
the desired identifier of the air- Figure 1-76
port or navaid as shown in
Figure 1-77. Note the bearing
and distance.
Figure 1-77

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-46
User Waypoints
15. Press the OK Softkey and
the selected identifier will be
Basic Operation
entered into the PLACE field

Section 1

the cursor over the BEARING
field as in Figure 1-79.
enter the waypoint bearing
noted from the WAYPOINT
ENTRY Page. Figure 1-78
18. In the same way as
entering the bearing, use the
Joystick to place the cursor
over the DISTANCE field.
enter the waypoint distance
noted from the WAYPOINT
ENTRY Page. Note that the
KMD 250 has also computed
the latitude/longitude for the
waypoint.
Figure 1-79
20. Press the SAVE & EXIT
Softkey.
Also, if a waypoint is defined by
entering the latitude/longitude
and an airport or navaid identi-
fier is then entered, the KMD
250 will compute the bearing
and distance of the waypoint
from the selected airport or
navaid.
After the waypoints are saved,
the User Waypoint List is dis-
played. Several waypoints Figure 1-80
have been entered in the example in Figure 1-80. One is a User Entered
Airport, denoted by the airport icon (see Entering A User Airport). The
lock symbol indicates that the waypoint is part of a flight plan and cannot
be deleted until removed from the flight plan.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-47
User Waypoints
ENTERING A USER AIRPORT
Basic Operation
A User Airport is actually a User Waypoint to which additional airport
Section 1
information may be added.
The first User Airport Edit display is used in the same way as the User
Waypoint Edit display as previously discussed. The following illustration
describes the second User Airport Edit display.
9
1
8
2
7
6
3
4 5
1 Waypoint Identifier - Editable on the first User Airport Edit display.
2 Runway Orientation - Selectable from 01/19 through 18/36.
3 Runway Surface Type - Hard or Soft can be selected.
4 Comm Frequecy Type - One of 33 abbreviations may be selected in each of two fields.
See Appendix A for abbreviations.
5 Comm Frequecies - Any valid 8.33 kHz or 25 kHz communication frequency in each of two
fields.
6 Runway Elevation - The runway elevation can be entered from -2000 to 30,000 ft.
7 Runway Length - The length of the runway can be entered from 0 to 20,000 ft.
8 Airport Icon - Airport symbol that will be displayed on the map. If the runway Surface is
set to Soft, the symbol will be of the type for a soft runway with no IFR approach. If the
runway Surface is set to Hard, the symbol will be of the type for a hard runway with no IFR
approach.
9 Waypoint Type - This field reflects Waypoint or Airport depending on the desired waypoint
definition. Selectable on the first User Airport Edit display.
After entering the identifier, remarks and position information as dis-

cussed in steps 1 through 19
of Entering A User Waypoint,
perform the following to enter
additional information airport
information.
the cursor over the TYPE field
Figure 1-81

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-48
User Waypoints
select Airport as shown in
Basic Operation
Figure 1-82. Note that the dis-

play title has changed to USER
Section 1
AIRPORT EDIT 1 of 2.
display USER AIRPORT 2 of 2
as shown in Figure 1-83. The
cursor will be initially be placed
in Runway orientation field and
the default will be None.
Figure 1-82
enter the desired runway orien-
tation. Values of 01/19 through
18/36 may be entered as seen
in Figure 1-84. Note that when
a value entered, the airport
icon now reflects a runway with
the entered orientation.
Figure 1-83
Figure 1-84

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-49
User Waypoints
the cursor in the Surface field
Basic Operation
Section 1
select either Soft or Hard for
the type of surface as shown in
Figure 1-86. Note that the air-
port icon has changed to
reflect a hard surface runway.
the cursor in the runway Figure 1-85
Length field. Use the Rotary
Knob to select the desired
runway length. A value from 0
to 20,000 feet can be entered.
Note that 2000 ft. has been
entered in Figure 1-87.
the cursor in the runway eleva-
tion (Elev) field. Use the
Rotary Knob to select the
desired runway elevation. A
value from -2000 to 30,000 feet
can be entered. See Figure 1- Figure 1-86
87.
Figure 1-87

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-50
User Waypoints
9. Two communication fre-
quencies may be entered to
Basic Operation
provide QuickTune™ capa-

bility. Use the Joystick to place
Section 1
the cursor in the desired comm

Type field as shown in Figure
1-88.
select the desired the fre-
quency type as shown in
Figure 1-89. See Table 1-3 for
a list of possible Type entries. Figure 1-88
11. In a similar manner as pre-

viously discussed, use the
Joystick and the Rotary Knob
to enter the desired frequen-
cies in the appropriate Freq
fields as seen in Figure 1-90.
12. When all desired entries
are completed, press the SAVE
& EXIT Softkey.
Figure 1-89
Figure 1-90

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-51
User Waypoints
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service
Basic Operation
PTAX Pre-Taxi Clearance
Section 1
CLR Clearance Delivery
GRND Ground Control
TWR Tower
GCO Ground Communication Outlet
UNIC Unicom
MCOM Multicom
CL B Class B Airspace (VFR Frequency)
CL C Class C Airspace (VFR Frequency)
TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area
APR Approach
DEP Departure
CTR Center
ARVL Arrival
AWOS Automated Weather Observation System
ASOS Automated Surface Observation System
CTA Control Area (VFR frequency used outside U.S.)
DIR Director (approach control/radar)
TMA Terminal Area (VFR frequency used outside U.S.)
RDR Radar-Only Frequency
RDO Radio
AAS Aeronautical Advisory Service
AFIS Aerodrome Flight Information Service
ATF Aerodrome Traffic Frequency
CTAF Common Traffic Advisory Frequency
MF Mandatory Frequency
ILS Instrument Landing System
LOC Localizer Approach
LBC Localizer Back Course
LDA Localizer Type Directional Aid Approach
SDF Simplified Directional Facility Approach
IGS Instrument Guidance System (used outside U.S. only)
Table 1-3 Comm Frequency Types

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-52
User Waypoints
EDITING A USER WAY-
POINT
Basic Operation
Section 1
Editing a waypoint is accom-

plished in a similar manner to
entering a new waypoint. To
edit a User Waypoint that has
been previously stored, per-
form the following steps:
display Figure 1-91. Press the Figure 1-91
AUX MENU Softkey to display
cursor over User Waypoints
2. Press the SELECT
WAYPOINT LIST display as
shown in Figure 1-93. Use the
Rotary Knob and Joystick to
select waypoint to edit.
3. Press the EDIT WPT Figure 1-92
WAYPOINT EDIT.
4. Repeat steps 3 through 20
in Entering A User Waypoint.
Figure 1-93

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-53
User Waypoints
DELETING A USER
WAYPOINT
Basic Operation
Section 1
To delete a User Waypoint that
has been previously stored,
perform the following steps:
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 in
Editing A User Waypoint.
2. Press the DELETE WPT
Softkey. Figure 1-94 will now
Figure 1-94
be displayed.
3. Press the OK Softkey to complete the deletion.
NOTE: Waypoints that are part of a flight plan (denoted by the lock
symbol in the User Waypoint List) cannot be deleted until removed from
the flight plan.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-54
Basic Operation User Waypoints

Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-55
Direct-To Operation
DIRECT-TO OPERATION
Basic Operation
The Direct-To Key initiates operation directly to a destination from the air-
Section 1
craft’s present position. This destination can be a User Waypoint or any
point defined in the database. It can also be used within an active flight
as discussed later in this section.
The KMD 250 must be navigating using the internal GPS when using the
Direct-To feature. If an external GPS is selected as the current naviga-
tion source, Direct-To will not be accessible on the KMD 250. In this
case the Direct-To operation
must be performed from the
external navigation source.
DIRECT-TO A DATA-
BASE OR STORED
WAYPOINT
1. If there is no active flight
plan, pressing the Direct-To
Key will display Figure 1-95.
2. Turn the Rotary Knob to Figure 1-95
display the Waypoint Entry
Page as shown previously in
Figure 1-76. The desired des-
tination can be entered here by
using the Rotary Knob as dis-
cussed previously.
3. Press the OK Softkey to
enter the destination in the
DIRECT TO field as in Figure
1-96.
Also, the NEAREST Softkey Figure 1-96
can be used to select a desti-
nation from the FIND
NEAREST list as discussed
earlier in this section. Pressing
the SELECT Softkey will enter
the selected identifier into the
DIRECT TO field.
4. Press the ACTIVATE
Softkey and the selected
Direct-To route will be dis-
played on the Map as shown in Figure 1-97
Figure 1-97.
KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-56
Direct-To Operation
DIRECT-TO USING THE
JOYSTICK POINTER
Basic Operation
Section 1
1. While on the Map Display,

use the Joystick Pointer to
select the desired destination
as in Figure 1-98. The pointer
can be placed anywhere on the
map, not just used to select
database items.
2. Press the Direct-To Key Figure 1-98
and the identifier for the
selected destination will be
entered into the DIRECT TO
field as shown in Figure 1-99.
If the Joystick Pointer is placed
on something other than a
database item, the next avail-
able default User Waypoint
name will appear in the
DIRECT TO field. This way-
point will be placed on the map Figure 1-99
at the position of the Joystick
Pointer. To change the way-
point name, see the discussion
on User Waypoints earlier in
this section.
Softkey and the route will be
displayed on the Map as
OBS COURSE MODE Figure 1-100
The Direct-To function also allows an OBS course to be navigated to the

selected destination. OBS Course Mode can be used independently to a
waypoint, or in conjunction with an active flight plan. See Using OBS
Course Mode Within A Flight Plan later in this section.
OBS Course Mode allows the selection of a course based on a bearing
“to” or “from” a waypoint much like a VOR receiver.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-57
Direct-To Operation
1. Select the destination as
discussed in the Direct-To pro-
Basic Operation
cedure.
Section 1
2. Press the OBS COURSE
Softkey shown in Figure 1-101.
This will display the OBS
COURSE window as shown in
Figure 1-102.
NOTE: Unless using OBS
Course Mode within an active
flight plan, Auto Leg Figure 1-101
Sequencing (see Appendix A)
will be disabled.
3. The course field will be
highlighted. Use the Rotary
Knob to select the desired
OBS course. If desired, the
Joystick can be used to select
the destination identifier in
order to enter a new destina-
tion. Turn the Rotary Knob to
display the WAYPOINT Figure 1-102
ENTRY window.
Softkey and the route will be
displayed on the Map as
NOTE: When OBS Mode is
active, pressing the Direct-To
Key will display the active OBS
COURSE window.
To change the OBS course to
a Direct-To route press the the Figure 1-103
Direct-To Key to display Figure 1-102. Press the DIR TO Softkey and a
Direct-To will be selected for the current identifier. Press the ACTIVATE
Softkey to enter and display the Direct-To route.
To center the CDI, from the OBS COURSE window (Figure 1-102) press
the DIR TO Softkey then press the OBS COURSE Softkey. The CDI will
now be centered.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-58
Basic Operation Direct-To Operation

Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-59
Flight Plan Operation

FLIGHT PLAN OPERATION
Basic Operation
VFR flight plans can be created in the KMD 250 when configured to use
Section 1
the internal GPS. In units without the optional internal GPS the active
flight plan from the external GPS may be viewed.
The FPL Key is used to toggle between the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page and the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX Page.
Active Flight
Plan
Flight Plan
Index
☞
NOTE: The internal GPS of the KMD 250 is not certified for IFR opera-
tion.
The KMD 250 calculates a flight plan by picking the most direct route
between selected waypoints. This is known as Leg Mode operation.
VIEWING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Press the FPL Key to display
the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Page as shown in Figure 1-
104. If the KMD 250 does not
have the optional internal GPS
the DONE and DELETE WPT
Softkeys will not be available.
The active leg and waypoint
are shown in magenta. When
Auto Leg Sequencing is
enabled, after passage of the
active waypoint the KMD 250
will automatically sequence to Figure 1-104
the next waypoint in the flight
plan. The next leg and active waypoint will then be displayed in
magenta.
The waypoints in the flight plan are listed on the left of display. Moving
the Joystick up or down will scroll through the waypoints. The magenta
arrow denotes the current leg of the flight plan. The active waypoint
identifier is also displayed in magenta. When scrolling through the way-

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-60

points, as each waypoint is
highlighted it is displayed on
Basic Operation
the map centered in the

window. The current leg and
Section 1
active waypoint are shown in

magenta on the map.
Information about a waypoint
can be viewed by using the
Joystick to select the desired
waypoint identifier in the list
and then pressing the MORE
INFO Softkey. Information will Figure 1-105
be displayed as shown in
Figure 1-105. Press the
CLEAR Softkey to exit.
Pressing the USE STICK
Softkey will allow use of the
Joystick Pointer for map inter-
rogation as discussed previ-
ously in Map Operation (see
RESET STICK Softkey to exit
Joystick Pointer operation.
If applicable, press the MORE Figure 1-106
INFO softkey to view more information about the selection. In the case
of an airport, pressing the NEXT softkey on the AIRPORT INFO 1 of 2
Page will display the AIRPORT INFO 2 of 2 and allow access to the
QUICK TUNE Softkey. Pressing this softkey will tune the radios to the
correct frequencies for the airport as discussed previously in Airport
Information.
VIEWING FLIGHT PLAN
DATA
When viewing the the ACTIVE

FLIGHT PLAN Page (Figure
1-105) or the STORED
FLIGHT PLAN Page, pressing
the DATA VIEW Softkey will
display more detailed data
pertaining to the flight plan
selected as shown in Figure 1- Figure 1-107
107. Pressing the MAP VIEW Softkey will return to the previous map
view display.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-61

FUEL FLOW
Basic Operation
If the KMD 250 is installed in
Section 1
conjunction with a fuel flow
monitor, the actual fuel flow
and estimated fuel usage cal-
culations will be displayed in
white as in Figure 1-107. This
will allow the KMD 250 to cal-
culate the fuel flow for each leg
of the flight plan based on cur-
rent ground speed. If no fuel Figure 1-108
flow monitor is used, the value
may be entered manually by
using the Joystick to select the
FFLOW field. Use the Rotary
Knob to enter the desired
value. User entered values,
and calculations based on user
entered data are displayed in
yellow as seen in Figure 1-108.
NOTE: Fuel flow values can
only be entered manually on
the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Figure 1-109
Page if no fuel flow monitor is
installed. DIS Distance En Route
CHANGING THE DATA DTK Desired Track
COLUMNS ESA En Route Safe Altitude
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
The three data columns can be
ETE Estimated Time En Route
changed to reflect various types
of information for each leg. To FUEL Estimated Fuel En Route
change the columns perform Leg Dis Leg Distance
the following steps. Leg Fuel Estimated Leg Fuel
Leg MSA Leg Minimum Safe Altitude
1. Press the CHANGE
FIELDS Softkey to display Leg Time Estimated Leg Time
Figure 1-109. Sunrise Sunrise Time
Sunset Sunset Time
2. Move the Joystick horizon-
tally to select the desired data column (in this case the first column).
3. Turn the Rotary Knob to select one of the available options from the
list. Each field can be customized to display any of the following:
4. Press the DONE Softkey when finished and the columns will now
display the selected data options.
Pressing the RESTORE DEFAULT Softkey to change the columns back
to the factory settings.
KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-62

CREATING A FLIGHT
PLAN
Basic Operation
Section 1
A maximum of 99 flight plans

may be stored in the KMD 250.
Each flight plan may contain up
to 99 waypoints. To create a
new flight plan, perform the fol-
lowing steps.
1. Press the FPL Key to
toggle to the FLIGHT PLAN Figure 1-110
INDEX Page. Initially, if no
flight plans have been stored,
the display will appear as
2. Press the NEW FPL
Softkey to display the STORED
FLIGHT PLAN Page as seen
in Figure 1-111. The first way-
point in the flight plan can be
entered using the Joystick
Pointer and selecting a point on
the map or by entering an iden-
tifier. Figure 1-111
To enter an identifier, turn the

Rotary Knob and the WAYPO-
INT ENTRY window will be dis-
played as in Figure 1-112. Use
desired starting waypoint in the
same manner as discussed in
previous procedures.
Figure 1-112

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-63

Press the OK Softkey and the
first waypoint is entered in the
Basic Operation
list as shown in Figure 1-113.
Section 1
To select the waypoint using
the Joystick Pointer, press the
USE STICK Softkey. Using
the Joystick, move the pointer
to the desired place on the
map as in Figure 1-114. Press
the INSERT WPT Softkey to
enter the waypoint in the list.
Figure 1-113
3. Continue entering way-
points using either method until
the flight plan is complete.
Press the DONE Softkey and
the flight plan will be entered
on the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX
Page as shown in Figure 1-
115.
Figure 1-114
Figure 1-115

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-64

4. To start using the flight
plan press the USE Softkey.
Basic Operation

Section 1

activate the flight plan as
ACTIVATING A STORED
FLIGHT PLAN
Perform the following steps to Figure 1-116
activate a flight plan that has
been stored in the KMD 250.
1. Press the FPL Key to dis-
play the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX
Page as seen in Figure 1-118.
Note that the current active
flight plan is displayed in
magenta with an arrow at the
top of the list stored flight plans.
2. Use the Joystick to select
the desired flight plan in the list. Figure 1-117
Figure 1-118

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-65

3. Press the USE Softkey and
Basic Operation
Section 1
use the selected flight plan. If
desired, the selected flight plan
can be navigated in reverse by
pressing the INVERT Softkey.
The selected flight plan will
now be displayed on the
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page
as in Figure 1-120. Figure 1-119
5. Press the DONE Softkey to

return to the FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX Page.
Figure 1-120

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-66

EDITING A STORED
FLIGHT PLAN
Basic Operation
Section 1
To edit the active or a stored

flight plan, begin by pressing
the FPL Key to display the
FLIGHT PLAN INDEX Page as
seen in Figure 1-121. Press
the EDIT/REVIEW Softkey to
display Figure 1-122. Now var-
ious editing parameters may be Figure 1-121
accomplished as in the fol-
lowing discussions.
Pressing the COPY Softkey will
allow the selected flight plan to
be copied for editing while not
changing the original.
DELETING A WAYPOINT IN
THE FLIGHT PLAN
To delete a waypoint in the Figure 1-122

flight plan, perform the fol-
lowing steps.
the waypoint to be deleted in
list on the left of the display.
2. Press the DELETE WPT
Softkey to display Figure 1-
delete the waypoint.
3. Press the DONE Softkey Figure 1-123
to return to the FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX Page.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-67

INSERTING A WAYPOINT IN
THE FLIGHT PLAN
Basic Operation
Section 1
To insert a waypoint in the flight
plan, perform the following
steps.
a waypoint in list to which the
new waypoint will be inserted
before or after (in this case
OTM) as shown in Figure 1- Figure 1-124
124.
2. Select the new waypoint
with one of the following
methods.
To enter an identifier, turn the
Rotary Knob and the WAYPO-
INT ENTRY window will be dis-
played as in Figure 1-125. Use
desired waypoint (KTVK) in the
same manner as discussed in Figure 1-125
previous procedures. Press
the OK Softkey and the way-
point is entered before OTM as
Figure 1-126

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-68

To select the waypoint using
the Joystick Pointer, press the
Basic Operation
USE STICK Softkey. Using the

Joystick, move the pointer to
Section 1
the desired place (KTVK) on

the map as in Figure 1-127.
Press the INSERT BEFORE or
INSERT AFTER Softkey to
enter the waypoint before or
after the waypoint selected in
the list as seen in Figure 1-128.
3. Press the RESET STICK Figure 1-127
Softkey and the new waypoint
will be displayed in the flight
plan as in Figure 1-129.
4. Press the DONE Softkey
to return to the FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX Page.
Figure 1-128
Figure 1-129

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-69

CHANGING THE NAME OF
THE FLIGHT PLAN
Basic Operation
Section 1
The name of the flight plan can
be changed from either the
STORED FLIGHT PLAN or
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Pages
while in FPL Map View or FPL
Data View.
To change the name of the
flight plan, perform the fol- Figure 1-130
lowing steps.
the flight plan name as shown
in Figure 1-130.
increment and the flight plan
name will shift to the left with
the first character highlighted
as in Figure 1-131.
3. Use the Rotary Knob to Figure 1-131
enter the desired first character
for the new waypoint name.
the next character field.
enter the next desired char-
acter for the new waypoint
name. Continue until the
desired name is entered as
seen in Figure 1-132.
Figure 1-132
Pressing the DEFAULT NAME
Softkey will cause the flight plan name to revert back to name previously
given by KMD 250. Pressing the CLEAR NAME Softkey will delete all
characters in the flight plan name field allowing different characters to be
entered.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-70

the new name will shift back to
Basic Operation
the center as in Figure 1-133.

Section 1
7. Press the DONE Softkey

and the new flight plan name
will be displayed in the list of
flight plans as shown in Figure
1-134.
DELETING A STORED Figure 1-133

FLIGHT PLAN
To delete a flight plan, perform

the following steps.
1. Press the FPL Key until
the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX
Page is displayed as shown in
Figure 1-134.
the flight plan name.
Figure 1-134
3. Press the DELETE
Softkey and Figure 1-135 will
be displayed.
the flight plan will be deleted.
Figure 1-135

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-71

DELETING THE ACTIVE
FLIGHT PLAN
Basic Operation
Section 1
To delete the active flight plan
perform the following steps:
1. Press the FPL Key until
the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX
Page is displayed as shown in
Figure 1-136. Note that the
active flight plan is highlighted
in magenta. Figure 1-136
2. Press the DELETE
be displayed to verify the dele-
tion of the active flight plan.
delete the active flight plan. As
shown in Figure 1-138, the
active flight plan is no longer
displayed. Note also that the
previously active flight plan has
not been deleted from the list
of stored flight plans. Figure 1-137
NOTE: If the active flight plan

has not been stored prior to
deleting, press the COPY
Softkey to store a copy of the
active flight plan before
pressing the DELETE Softkey.
Figure 1-138

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-72
USING DIRECT-TO IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

Basic Operation
Sometimes it may be desirable to proceed directly to a waypoint in a

Section 1
flight plan or a specific leg in a flight plan. For example, after takeoff in a
terminal area, vectors may be given followed by a clearance directly to
the first waypoint in the filed flight plan or to intercept a particular leg in
the filed flight plan. A Direct-To can be performed to the waypoint or to
the flight plan leg. After reaching the waypoint or leg the KMD 250 will
automatically begin navigating the active flight plan. If waypoints exist in
the flight plan prior to that which the Direct-To is established, these way-
points will be bypassed. If a Direct-To is established to a waypoint not in
the flight plan, the navigation of the active flight plan will not resume after
the Direct-To waypoint is reached.
NOTE: Remember, the internal GPS of the KMD 250 is not certified for
IFR operation. Navigation of ATC clearances on the KMD 250 can only
be done as a backup to the primary navigation system.
PROCEEDING DIRECT-TO
AN ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
WAYPOINT
To do a Direct-To to a way-
point within an active flight plan
perform the following steps.
1. Press the Direct-To Key to
2. Use the Joystick to scan
the waypoints in the active Figure 1-139
flight plan.
3. When the desired waypoint
is displayed, press the
ACTIVATE Softkey and the
Map will again be displayed as
in Figure 1-140. Note the
Direct-To is now plotted from
aircraft’s present position to the
waypoint.
Figure 1-140

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-73

4. The Direct-To will also be
denoted on the ACTIVE
Basic Operation
FLIGHT PLAN Page. Press
the FPL Key and note the
Section 1
change in the magenta arrow
in the waypoint list indicates a
Direct-To the waypoint as
After the waypoint is reached,
the KMD 250 will navigate the
remainder of the active flight
plan. Figure 1-141
MANUALLY SELECTING AN
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN LEG
To select a specific leg within

an active flight plan perform the
following steps.
display the Direct-To window
as shown previously in Figure
1-139 . Figure 1-142
2. Press the Direct-To Key a
second time to display Figure
1-142.
3. Use the Joystick to scan
the flight plan legs.
4. When the desired leg is
displayed, press the ACTI-
VATE Softkey and the Map will
again be displayed as in Figure
1-143. Note the airplane is
navigating to intercept the Figure 1-143
selected flight plan leg.
After the leg is intercepted, the KMD 250 will provide navigation guid-
ance the remainder of the active flight plan.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-74

DELETING A DIRECT-TO
WITHIN THE ACTIVE
Basic Operation
FLIGHT PLAN
Section 1
If it becomes necessary to
delete a Direct-To in an active
flight plan (as seen in Figure 1-
140), perform the following
steps:
2. Press the DELETE

DIRECT Softkey to display
Figure 1-145.
The Map will again be dis-
played with guidance to inter-
cept and resume the active
flight plan as shown in Figure
1-146.
Figure 1-145
Figure 1-146

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-75

USING OBS COURSE MODE IN THE ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN
Basic Operation
Section 1
It may also be desirable to proceed directly to a waypoint in a flight plan
on a specific bearing. An OBS Course can be set to the waypoint. If
Automatic Leg Sequencing (see Appendix A) is enabled, after reaching
the waypoint the KMD 250 will automatically begin navigating the next
leg in the active flight plan. If Automatic Leg Sequencing is disabled, the
aircraft will overfly the waypoint and continue on the selected course. If
waypoints exist in the flight plan prior to that which the OBS Course is
established, these waypoints will be bypassed. If an OBS Course is
established to a waypoint not in the flight plan, the navigation of the
active flight plan will not resume after the waypoint is reached.
SETTING AN OBS COURSE

TO AN ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN WAYPOINT
To set an OBS Course to a

waypoint within an active flight
plan perform the following
steps.
2. Use the Joystick to scan Figure 1-147
the waypoints in the active
flight plan.
3. When the desired waypoint
is displayed, press the OBS
COURSE Softkey to display
Figure 1-148. Enter the
desired bearing “to” or “from”
the waypoint.
Figure 1-148

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-76

4. Use the Joystick to high-
light the Auto Leg Seq. field
Basic Operation

Section 1

select Enabled. With Auto Leg
Sequencing enabled the
remaining portion of the flight
plan will automatically resume
after passing the waypoint.
Softkey to start navigating the Figure 1-149
OBS Course. The selected
course will be displayed as the
active portion of the flight plan
Figure 1-150

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-77

DELETING AN OBS
COURSE WITHIN THE
Basic Operation
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Section 1
If it becomes necessary to
cancel the selected OBS
Course in an active flight plan
(as seen in Figure 1-150), per-
form the following steps:
2. Press the DELETE

DIRECT Softkey and Figure 1-
152 will be displayed.
confirm the deletion. The map
will now display the active flight
plan in Leg Mode as shown on
Figure 1-153.
Figure 1-152
Figure 1-153

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-78

TRIP PLANNING USING
PRESENT POSITION
Basic Operation
Section 1
For planning purposes the

internal calculator can be used
to determine such things as
time, distance and required fuel
to waypoints, for another flight
plan or for modifications to the
active flight plan. This is done
by inserting the aircraft’s prese- Figure 1-154
nt position into a desired sce-
nario and using the data view
of the Active Flight Plan Page
and selecting the desired data
columns to present the needed
information.
The following example illus-
trates checking time, distance
and required fuel to KDSM
while navigating a flight plan
from KIXD to KOSH as shown
Figure 1-155
on Figure 1-154.
1. Perform the following steps
to create a new flight plan as
previously discussed.
2. Enter the desired destina-
tion (in this case KDSM) using
the Rotary Knob as shown in
Figure 1-155.
Figure 1-156

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-79

light the destination identifier
Basic Operation
Section 1
increment to display Figure 1-
158.
6. Press the INSERT PPOS
Softkey and the aircraft’s
present position will be inserted
before the selected identifier as Figure 1-157
seen in Figure 1-159. ETA,
distance and required fuel to
KDSM are now displayed in
the data columns based on
current ground speed and fuel
flow (FFLOW) value indicated.
Inserting the aircraft’s present
position in the flight plan is just
like inserting any other way-
point in the flight plan except
the position continually
updates. Figure 1-158
Note the ground speed and

fuel flow values shown in
Figure 1-159 indicate actual
values by being displayed in
white. Fuel flow is taken from
a fuel flow monitor and GPS
ground speed is being used.
7. If desired, press the
CHANGE FIELDS Softkey to
change the data columns as
discussed previously to view Figure 1-159
other calculated data for the destination.
8. If desired, both the ground speed (GNDSPD) and fuel flow (FFLOW)
can be changed to a user defined number to view various “what if” sce-
narios.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:40 PM Page 1-80

9. To change the ground
speed as in Figure 1-60, Use
Basic Operation
the Joystick to place the cursor

Section 1
in the desired field. Use the

Rotary Knob to enter the
desired values. Note the
changes to the ETA and FUEL.
Yellow indicates user entered
data and data calculated from
user entered data.
10. With the cursor over the Figure 1-160
GNDSPD value, press the USE
ACTUAL Softkey to return the
ground speed to the actual
GPS ground speed as shown
in Figure 1-161. Note also that
the ETA and FUEL values
have also returned to actual
values.
Fuel flow (FFLOW) values can
be changed in the same
manner as ground speed. Fuel Figure 1-161
flow and ground speed can
also be changed in conjunction with one another to work out different
scenarios.
NOTE: If the KMD 250 is not interfaced with a functioning fuel flow mon-
itor, the fuel values will always be displayed in yellow.
11. Press the DONE Softkey to return to the FLIGHT PLAN INDEX
Page. The flight plan created in this process can now be deleted if no
longer needed.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-81
System Setup
SYSTEM SETUP
Basic Operation
This portion of the manual is
Section 1
designed to provide step by
step instructions for the setup
of the KMD 250. Note that not
all features discussed here are
available in all installations. If
an item is not available it will
appear “grayed out” and will
not be selectable.
Figure 1-162
MAP SETUP

display Figure 1-162. Press
the MAP SETUP Softkey to
display Figure 1-163. Use the
Joystick to select the desired
field and turn the Rotary Knob
to make the desired changes.
Pressing the OVLY SETUP
Softkey will go directly to
OVERLAYS GROUP Page for Figure 1-163
selection of map overlays as
discussed later in Map Setup.
Orientation: Set either in Track Up, North Up or Heading Up.
Extended TRK: Turns on or off the extended track line, which is drawn
ahead of the present position in the direction of the present track.
Range Rings: Turns range rings on or off on the map.
Airport Settings: Selectable airport filtering for display on the map.
Min Rwy Len: Minimum Runway Length allows the display of airports
on the map based on minimum runway length. This can be set to Any or
1000 ft to 5000 ft in 100 foot increments.
Surface: Allows the display of airports on the map based on Any sur-
face or Hard surface only.
Label: May be set to display the airport on the map with ICAO identifier,
the airport Name or City.
All settings on MAP SETTINGS GROUP 1 affect all map displays for all
functions. Settings on GROUP 2 through 6 affects only the displays for
the currently viewed function.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-82
System Setup
2. Press the NEXT GROUP
Softkey to display the AVIATI-
Basic Operation
ON ICON GROUP Page as in

Figure 1-164.
Section 1
VFR Map aviation related icons

are shown with corresponding
definitions.
The next series of menus
allows customizing of the Map
Displays to show the amount of
data desired for ease of read- Figure 1-164
ability at various display
ranges.
The maximum range settings at
which the ICON, LINE and/or
TEXT is displayed on the map
may be selected for each cate-
gory. Use the Joystick to
select the desired field and turn
the Rotary Knob to change the
setting.
Softkey to display the AVIATI- Figure 1-165
ON LINE GROUP Page as in
Figure 1-165.
VFR Map aviation related lines
definitions.
The database filters airspace
first by class, then by type. If
the class is not known and the
type does not fit into one of the
categories, it will be displayed
as Unknown.
Figure 1-166
Other SUA types are Radar
Area, Alert, Caution, Training, Warning or Unspecified.
Again, use the Joystick to select the desired field and turn the Rotary
Knob to change the setting.
NOTE: Class A, E, F and G airspace will not be shown in the United
States, but are in the international data.
4. Press the NEXT GROUP Softkey to display the LAND ICON
GROUP Page as in Figure 1-166.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-83
System Setup
VFR Map land related icons
Basic Operation
definitions.
Section 1
As before, use the Joystick to
setting.
Softkey to display the second
LAND LINE GROUP Page as
in Figure 1-167. Figure 1-167
Again, use the Joystick to
setting.
or OVLY SETUP Softkey to
display the OVERLAYS
GROUP Page as in Figure 1-
168.
Overlay icons are shown with
corresponding definitions.
Figure 1-168
NOTE: Some functions may not
be available in certain installations. Unavailable functions will appear
gray with dashes for values and will not be selectable.
If Stormscope, a Traffic Avoidance System and/or Flight Information
Services have been installed, control of how the data is displayed (or not
displayed) on the map is accomplished on this page. The maximum
range settings at which the ICON and TEXT is displayed on the map
may be selected for each function. Use the Joystick to select the desired
field and turn the Rotary Knob to change the setting.
7. Press the DONE Softkey when Map Setup is complete.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-84
System Setup
NAVIGATION SETUP
Basic Operation

Section 1

170.
Navigation Setup then press
the SELECT Softkey to display
the first the NAV DATA SET- Figure 1-169
TINGS Page as in Figure 1-
171.
the desired item and use the
Rotary Knob to change the
value.
Current NAV Source :
Used to select the navigation
source in units with the optional
internal GPS. Can be set to
Internal GPS or External.
Options are dependent on Figure 1-170
installation configuration.
AutoNav : If the KMD 250
is installed to function with an
external GPS source, such as
a KLN 94, and KMD 250 has
the optional internal GPS, the
system is capable of automati-
cally switching from the
external GPS source to the
internal GPS when situations
dictate. When AutoNav is
enabled, this allows the system Figure 1-171
to prompt the user for a change
in navigation source if valid position data is not being received from the
external source. The flight plan will be copied from the external naviga-
tion source to the KMD 250 active flight plan. Navigation displayed will
be limited to VFR only as annunciated by INTERNAL VFR GPS.
Options are dependent on installation configuration.
CDI Scale: Used to set the sensitivity of the Course Deviation Indicator
when being viewed in a Data Field. Options are 5nm, 1nm or .3nm.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-85
System Setup
NOTE: The 0.3 nm scale could result in overly active roll performance
depending upon the particular autopilot installation. Use of the 1 nm or 5
Basic Operation
nm CDI scale may be preferred during autopilot operation.
Section 1
Time Zone: Selection determines the time displayed in any time related
Data Field. The next line gives a description of the abbreviation and the
offset from UTC time. When Local Time is selected the UTC offset field
will be an entry field to input the local offset value. The following is a list
of the available Time Zone options:
UTC Coordinated Universal Time/Zulu
GST Greenland Standard Time UTC-3
GDT Greenland Daylight Time UTC-2
ATS Atlantic Standard Time UTC-4
ATD Atlantic Daylight Time UTC-3
EST Eastern Standard Time UTC-5
EDT Eastern Daylight Time UTC-4
CST Central Standard Time UTC-6
CDT Central Daylight Time UTC-5
MST Mountain Standard Time UTC-7
MDT Mountain Daylight Time UTC-6
PST Pacific Standard Time UTC-8
PDT Pacific Daylight Time UTC-7
AKS Alaska Standard Time UTC-9
AKD Alaska Daylight Time UTC-8
HAS Hawaii Standard Time UTC-10
HAD Hawaii Daylight Time UTC-9
SST Samoa Standard Time UTC-11
SDT Samoa Daylight Time UTC-10
LCL Local Time User entered in 1/2 hour increments
Magnetic Variation: The magnetic variation used for navigation calcula-
tions. Options are Auto, Manual or External depending on installation
configuration. When Manual is selected, the offset can be entered using
the Rotary Knob.
display the second NAV DATA
SETTINGS Page as in Figure
1-172.
Position Format: Determines
whether position information is
displayed with reference to
Lat/Lon (Latitude/Longitude),
UTM (Universal Transverse
Mercator) or OSGB (Ordinance
Survey of Great Britain) in the Figure 1-172
PPOS Data Field. This will also
affect the PBRG and PDIS data when the Joystick Pointer is active.
Note: OSGB is only defined for Great Britain.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-86
System Setup
Near Pos Format: Determines parameters used to display the near
position reporting when viewed in a Data Field. Can be set to
Basic Operation
Airports+VORs, VORs only or All data.

Section 1
Turn Anticipation: When turned on, turn guidance to a new course is

provided along an arc.
SUA Alerting: When turned on, a Special Use Airspace Alert Message
will be annunciated when the aircraft is approximately 10 minutes or two
miles from entering the airspace.
SUA Alerting Buffer: Defines the altitude boundary for the Special Use
Airspace at which the Alert Message is annunciated. Can be set from
300 feet to 59900 feet in 100 foot increments.
Default/WPT Char.: Defines the default first character displayed in way-
point data entry fields. Use the Rotary Knob to enter the desired
alphanumeric character.
6. Press the AUX MENU Softkey to return to the first NAV DATA SET-
TINGS Page. Now press the DONE Softkey to exit the setup.
DEMO MODE & SETUP

A great way to become familiar with all the features of the KMD 250 is to
use it’s built in Demo Mode. When the KMD 250 is in the Demo Mode, it
performs as if it is receiving adequate sensor signals to use the various
functions. Units without the optional internal GPS, a pre-programmed
flight plan determined by the database type being used can be navi-
gated. Units containing the optional internal GPS can navigate any user
programmed waypoints or flight plans.
In order for the KMD 250 to function in the Demo Mode it must be used
in conjunction with a product such as the Commander 2900 from Lone
Star Aviation.
For more information on the Commander 2900-KMD 250, or to place an
order, contact:
Lone Star Aviation, Inc.
604 Wisteria Street
Mansfield, TX 76063
Phone: (682) 518-8882
FAX: (682) 518-8831
www.lonestaraviation.com
The KMD 250 is automatically put into Demo Mode when it is used with
a Commander 2900. In addition, an authorized Honeywell Service
Center may also arrange for you to put the KMD 250 into Demo Mode by
grounding the appropriate pin at the back of the unit while it is removed
from the aircraft and is connected to an appropriate power supply. The
KMD 250 must never be put into the Demo Mode when it is installed in
the aircraft.
KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-87
System Setup
After power-up is complete
Basic Operation
Press the DEMO MODE
Section 1
be displayed. Press the OK
Softkey to acknowledge the
caution.
Press the OK Softkey to
acknowledge the next caution
displays as in previous discus-
sions.
Figure 1-173
DEMO MODE FOR NON-
GPS VERSIONS
If KMD 250 does not have the

optional internal GPS it will
begin navigating a simulated
flight plan that is stored on
each of the three different
types of data cards as shown
in Table 1-4.
In this example the AMR data-
base is installed, therefore, Figure 1-174
Figure 1-175 shows the pre-programmed flight plan for KIXD to KOSH.
Database Type Starting Waypoint Destination Waypoint
AMR (Americas) KIXD KOSH
PAI (Pacific International) YSSY YBBN
ATI (Atlantic International) EGHD EGNJ
Table 1-4 Demo flight plan Waypoints
The system defaults for Demo

Mode will automatically start
the demo at the beginning
waypoint for the flight plan
stored in the data card. The
simulated flight will be at an
altitude of 2000 feet and
groundspeed will be 135 knots.
Track and heading will be
equal.
Figure 1-175

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-88
System Setup
DEMO MODE FOR GPS
VERSIONS
Basic Operation
Section 1
If the KMD 250 contains the

optional internal GPS, way-
points and flight plans may be
created, stored and navigated
in the Demo Mode. After
entering Demo Mode refer to
previous discussions for opera-
tion of the KMD 250.
Figure 1-176
CHANGING DEMO MODE
SETTINGS
To modify the Demo Mode set-

tings, perform the following
steps:
play the AUX MENU Softkey
as in Figure 1-176.
Softkey to display Figure 1- Figure 1-177
177. If necessary, use the
Joystick to highlight Demo
Mode Setup as shown.
3. Press the SELECT Softkey
to display Figure 1-178. In ver-
sions without the optional
internal GPS, the default Mode
setting is Auto. When Auto is
selected, all other parameters
will be “grayed out”. To change
the other parameters, turn the
Rotary Knob to select Manual
in the Mode field. The Joystick Figure 1-178
may now be used to select the
desired field. Turn the Rotary Knob to enter the desired values.
In versions containing the optional internal GPS, Mode is not available
and all fields are selectable and editable.
4. When finished making changes, press the RESTART DEMO Softkey
to begin the demo using the new parameters.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-89
System Setup
SOFTWARE VERSIONS
Basic Operation
The current unit software ver-
Section 1
sion may be checked by per-
forming the following steps:
as in Figure 1-176.
179. If necessary, use the Figure 1-179
Joystick to highlight Software
Versions as shown.
Figure 1-180

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-90
System Setup
DATABASE VERSIONS
Basic Operation
The current database version

Section 1
may be checked by performing

the following steps:
as in Figure 1-176.
181. If necessary, use the Figure 1-181
Joystick to highlight Database
Versions as shown.
NOTE: If a new datacard is not
installed before the date shown
under SUBSCRIPTION DATA,
the KMD 250 will no longer
receive FIS subscriptions even
if the FIS subscriptions are cur-
rent. Figure 1-182

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-91
Map Display Icons

MAP DISPLAY ICONS
Basic Operation
The following table shows the map display icons and their meanings:
Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-92
Basic Operation Map Display Icons

Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-93
Map Display Icons
Basic Operation
Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-94
Basic Operation Map Display Icons

Section 1

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-95
Datacards
DATACARDS
Basic Operation
Section 1
DATA AREAS
Honeywell produces three datacards based on the ICAO/ARINC geo-

graphic areas for the KMD 250 that cover the entire world. Each card for
each area contains the operating software, the appropriate Jeppesen
aeronautical data, cartographic data and topological data to a high reso-
lution. Also included is a low resolution map of the rest of the world.
The ten ICAO/ARINC areas along with their three letter identifiers are:
AFR Africa CAN Canada EEU Eastern Europe
EUR Europe LAM Latin America MES Middle East
PAC Pacific SAM South America SPA South Pacific
USA USA
These areas are combined to produce three data cards covering the
entire world that contain the following data:
AMR Americas - comprising CAN, USA, LAM, SAM
ATI Atlantic International - comprising EUR, AFR, EEU, MES
PAI Pacific International - comprising PAC, SPA, EEU, MES

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-96
Datacards
INSERTING A NEW
DATACARD
Basic Operation
Section 1
Each KMD 250 Database cycle

will result in the necessity to
load a new database when
using the database subscripti-
on service. This is done by
inserting a new datacard.
NOTE: Since all user way-
points and flight plans are Figure 1-183
stored on the datacard, it will
be necessary to transfer this
data to the new datacard.
The following displays depict
those seen on a KMD 250 con-
taining the internal GPS.
To change the datacard follow
these steps:
1. Turn off the KMD 250.
2. Push in the datacard until it
clicks, then release. The data- Figure 1-184
card should now slide straight
out.
3. With the new card facing
upward, as indicated on it’s
label, insert the new datacard
until it clicks. The new data-
card is now locked in place.
4. Turn the unit on and, if
necessary, wait for the new
software to load.
5. Figure 1-183 will be dis- Figure 1-185
played to allow flight plans and
waypoints stored on the previous datacard to be moved to the new data-
card. Press the YES Softkey to move stored data. Other wise press the
NO Softkey.
6. After pressing the YES Softkey, Figure 1-184 will be displayed. As
directed, remove the new datacard and re-insert the old datacard.
7. When Figure 1-185 is displayed re-insert the new datacard.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-97
Datacards
8. The flight plans and way-
points are now written to the
Basic Operation
new card as shown in Figure 1-
Section 1
NOTE: In units that do not
contain the internal GPS, refer-
ences to flight plans will not be
displayed. For example the
title of the window in Figure 1-
186 will be “USER WAYPOINT
DATA STORED”.
Figure 1-186
TRANSFERRING DATA
BETWEEN DATACARDS
User stored data such as flight

plans and waypoints can be
moved between datacards.
The following displays depict
those seen on a KMD 250 con-
taining the internal GPS.
STORE CURRENT USER Figure 1-187

DATA ON ANOTHER DATA-
CARD
To move from one datacard to

another, perform the following
steps:
light User FPL Save/Load as Figure 1-188
shown.
3. Press the SELECT Softkey to display Figure 1-188.
4. If necessary, use the Joystick to highlight Store current user data
on another datacard.
5. Press the SELECT Softkey.

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-98
Datacards
6. When Figure 1-189 is dis-
played, insert the datacard to
Basic Operation
which the data will be copied.

Section 1
7. After the datacard is

inserted, the data will be copied
and Figure 1-190 will displayed
indicating the data was copied
successfully.
8. Re-insert the original data-
card.
Figure 1-189
NOTE: In units that do not con-
tain the internal GPS, refer-
190 will be “USER WAYPOINT
DATA STORED”.
RETRIEVE USER DATA

FROM ANOTHER DATA-
CARD
To move from one datacard to Figure 1-190

another, perform the following
steps:
light User FPL Save/Load as
shown.
Figure 1-191

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-99
Datacards
3. Press the SELECT
Basic Operation
192.
Section 1
4. If necessary, use the
Joystick to highlight Read user
data from another datacard.
5. Press the SELECT
Softkey.
6. When Figure 1-193 is dis-
played, insert the datacard
Figure 1-192
containing the data to be
copied.
7. After the datacard is
inserted, the data will be read
and Figure 1-194 will displayed
indicating the data is ready to
be copied.
8. Re-insert the original data-
card that will receive the data.
Figure 1-193
Figure 1-194

KMD 250 PG R2 4/29/04 1:41 PM Page 1-100
Datacards
9. Figure 1-195 will be dis-
played indicating data on the
Basic Operation
datacard will be overwritten.

Section 1

overwrite.
11. Figure 1-196 will be dis-
played showing that the data
has been stored on the data-
card.
Figure 1-195
continue.
NOTE: In units that do not
contain the internal GPS, refer-
195 will be “STORING USER
WAYPOINT DATA”.
DATABASE
INFORMATION
Figure 1-196
Due to Honeywell’s policy of
continual development and routine database updates, new datacards will
become available every 28 days. As a registered owner of a KMD 250,
you will be offered a 1/3/6/12 monthly datacard subscription.
DATABASE CYCLE INFORMATION
Keeping the database current in the KMD 250 is the user’s responsibility.
Honeywell maintains its databases to be current at all times to the latest
Jeppesen 28-day data cycle.
For database subscriptions and FIS subscriptions, contact Wingman
Services at the following numbers:
1-800-247-0230 if calling within the United States or Canada

(913) 712-3145 if calling from outside the United States or Canada
(913) 712-3904 FAX
e-mail: [email protected]
Visit Wingman Services at www.bendixking.com

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-1
Introduction
SECTION 2
FIS OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
CONCEPT OF OPERATION
The Flight Information Services (FIS) system supplies real-time weather
information and other flight advisory information to pilots to enhance situ-
ation awareness.
FIS Operation
Section 2
FIS is not intended to replace voice radio services. Voice communication
of weather and meteorological information, in accordance with FAA
operating rules, is still required.
The FIS system is operational 24 hours / day, 7 days / week. Data
acquired from FAA approved weather sources is processed at the hub
and then distributed to Ground Stations. The Ground Stations broadcast
the information over a VHF Data Link (VDL) to aircraft within line-of-sight
utilizing VDL mode 2 transmitters at a bit rate up to 31.5 kbps.
The following diagram illustrates how FIS data is received in the aircraft.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-2
Introduction
At the time of this printing, coverage is not available in all locations. See
our website at www.bendixking.com for network status.
When the network is fully deployed, continuous coverage of the conti-
nental US is possible at altitudes as low as 5,000 ft. AGL, except for
regions of precipitous terrain. As with all VHF communications, the line-
of-sight range increases with altitude. However, there is no appreciable
increase in coverage above 17,500 ft MSL. The following illustration
shows how altitude influences FIS coverage.
FIS Operation
Section 2
To receive FIS products, an aircraft must be equipped with a compatible

VDL receiver (KDR 510), dedicated VHF antenna, and appropriate dis-
play (KMD 250). FIS uses a one-way (ground-to-air) broadcast protocol.
Data is continually broadcast without the need to request information, nor
acknowledge receipt.
Both basic (no-cost) and value added fee-based products are trans-
mitted. Basic products are displayed using standard ICAO/WMO textual
format. Most fee-based products are displayed in a graphical form.
The following basic services are obtained through a no-cost subscription
service:
Aviation Routine Weather Reports (METARs)
Aviation Selected Special Weather Reports (SPECIs)
Terminal Area Forecasts (TAFs)
Pilot Reports (PIREPs)
AIRMETs
SIGMETs
Convective SIGMETs
Weather Watches

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-3
Introduction
The following are offered through a fee-based subscription service:
NEXRAD Base Reflectivity
Graphical METARs
Graphical AIRMETs
Graphical SIGMETs
Graphical Convective SIGMETs
Graphical Weather Watches
The ground station network repetitively broadcasts the same product
until either newer data is available or the information has exceeded a
pre-determined expiration time. Basic products are broadcast at least
FIS Operation
Section 2
once every 5 minutes.
NOTE: Due to inherent delays, areas of coverage and relative age and
availability of the data that can be experienced, FIS data cannot be
viewed as an absolute depiction of conditions at a specific location.
EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW
The FIS (Flight Information Services) Function of the Bendix/King KMD
250 allows for the display and control of textual and graphical weather
information received from the Bendix/King KDR 510 VDL Receiver.
This section describes the operation of the KMD 250 display and dis-
cusses the proper use of the displayed data for strategic weather plan-
ning.
The Bendix/King KMD 250 is shown below with the FIS Text Page
selected.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-4
Introduction
CAUTION
FIS information is to be used as a strategic planning tool for pilot
decisions on avoiding inclement weather areas that are beyond
visual range or where poor visibility precludes visual acquisition of
inclement weather. FIS information may be used as follows:
a. To aid the pilot in situational awareness of hazardous meteo-
rological conditions.
b. As a cue to the pilot to communicate with the ATC con-
troller, AFSS specialist, Operator Dispatch, or Airline Operations
Control Center (AOCC) to get further information about the current
FIS Operation
meteorological conditions. In no case should the pilot take any eva-

Section 2
sive action based solely upon the FIS display.

The FIS information is intended for assistance in strategic flight
planning purposes only and lacks sufficient resolution and
updating necessary for tactical maneuvering.
FIS FUNCTION STATUS ICONS
The FIS Function Status Icons are located in the lower left of the display.
They are used to indicate whether or not the KMD 250 is currently
receiving and/or displaying FIS information. The following table shows
the various FIS icons and their meanings:

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-5
Basic Service Weather Products
BASIC SERVICE WEATHER PRODUCTS

The following is a discussion of weather products offered with the basic
no-fee service. Accessing and navigating these services will be dis-
cussed in detail later in this addendum.
METAR
A METAR (Aviation Routine Weather Report) describes the specific
weather conditions at a particular airport at a given time. The elements
of a METAR are in order as follows:
FIS Operation
Section 2
1. Type of report
2. ICAO station identifier
3. Date and time of issue
4. Modifier (AUTO if automated report or COR if corrected observation)
5. Wind
6. Visibility
7. Runway visual range (as required)
8. Weather phenomena
9. Sky condition
10. Temperature/dew point group
11. Altimeter
12. Remarks (as required)
METARs available within the selected range of the selected area will be
displayed up to a maximum of 25 reports. These reports are displayed
in an encoded textual format. METARs displayed graphically on the
map are offered through a subscription service.
NOTE: When a specific element of METAR data is not available, it is
omitted from the report. The user must know the sequence of data to
recognize omissions. METAR observations older than 120 minutes will
be discarded.
See the section on Understanding Textual Aviation Weather Reports, for
instructions on decoding textual METARs.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-6

SPECI
A SPECI (Aviation Selected Special Weather Report) is related to the
METAR. SPECIs are issued when certain specific conditions or events
have been observed at a particular location, usually an airport. A SPECI
will contain the same elements as a METAR and will generally be issued
for the following reasons:
1. Sudden, extreme changes in wind speed and/or direction.
2. Changes in surface visibility, especially those that change the flying
category at the reporting site.
FIS Operation
3. Changes in runway visibility above or below 2,400 feet.

Section 2
4. Appearance or termination of significant weather or natural atmos-

pheric events such as tornados, waterspouts, funnel clouds, thun-
derstorms, squalls and volcanic eruptions.
5. Changes in precipitation intensity or form.
6. Changes to ceilings when previously reported ceilings were at or
below 3,000 feet, or the formation of a ceiling below 3,000 feet.
Also, new formation of cloud layers or other obscuring phenomenon
that occur below 1,000 feet.
7. Aircraft mishaps.
8. Other meteorological conditions that the agency or the observer
determine as critical.
Refer to the section on METARs for an explanation of the elements.
The element sequence and content will be the same as those in a
METAR report with the exception of the first element denoting report
type. “SPECI” will be seen in place of “METAR”.
NOTE: When a specific element of SPECI data is not available, it is
omitted from the report. The user must know the sequence of data to
recognize omissions. SPECI observations older than 120 minutes will
be discarded.
Basic service SPECIs are offered in the encoded textual format.
instructions on decoding textual METAR/SPECIs.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-7

TAF
A TAF (Terminal Area Forecast) is a statement of expected meteorolog-
ical conditions at an airport during a specified period of time. Many
aspects of the TAF are the same as a METAR. Abbreviations are the
same as in a METAR with addition of a few more discussed later. Many
of the data elements are formatted as those in a METAR report. A TAF
will contain elements in the following order:
1. Type of report
2. ICAO station identifier
3. Date and time of issue
FIS Operation
4. Date and time valid
Section 2
5. Wind
6. Visibility
7. Weather phenomena
8. Sky conditions
9. Wind shear (as required)
10. Forecast weather change indicator
TAFs available within the selected range of the selected area will be dis-
played up to a maximum of 25 reports. These reports are displayed in
an encoded textual format.
NOTE: TAFs older than the forecast validity period are discarded.
instructions on decoding textual TAFs.
PIREP
A PIREP (Pilot Weather Report) is an observation of conditions at a spe-
cific location or along a specific route. These conditions are reported by
pilots when communications are established with ground facilities such
EFAS, AFSS/FSS, ARTCC or ATC. Abbreviations are the same as in a
METAR. Pilots are encouraged to promptly volunteer these reports. A
PIREP will contain elements in the following order:
1. Type of message (urgent or routine)
2. Location in relation to an airport or VHF NAVAID
3. Time observed
4. Flight Level (may not always be present)
5. Type of aircraft (may not always be present)
6. Sky cover (may not always be present)

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-8

7. Weather conditions (may not always be present)
8. Temperature (may not always be present)
9. Wind direction and speed (may not always be present)
10. Turbulence (may not always be present)
11. Icing (may not always be present)
12. Remarks (may not always be present)
PIREPs available within the selected range of the selected area will be
displayed up to a maximum of 25 reports. These reports are displayed
in an encoded textual format.
FIS Operation
NOTE: PIREPs older than 120 minutes are discarded.

Section 2

instructions on decoding textual PIREPs.
AIRMET
An AIRMET (Airman’s Meteorological Information) is an advisory of
significant weather that could be hazardous to single engine, light aircraft
and VFR pilots. However, parameters are such that the phenomena
does not require issuance of a SIGMET. AIRMETs address details
regarding IFR, extensive mountain obscuration, turbulence, strong sur-
face winds, icing and freezing levels. AIRMETs are considered wide-
spread because they must either be affecting or forecast to affect an
area at least 3,000 square miles. However, during the forecast period,
the actual affected area may be much smaller. AIRMETs are issued
every six hours and the maximum forecast period is 6 hours. An
AIRMET will contain elements in the following order:
1. Forecast Area
2. Report Type
3. Date and time issued
4. Report designation and reason for issuance
5. Validity period
6. Area of coverage
7. Weather phenomenon details.
These reports are displayed in an encoded textual format.
NOTE: AIRMETs may be issued up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the
validity period. The FIS system will display the data age as zero until the
start of the validity period. AIRMETs older than 360 minutes are dis-
carded.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-9

When an AIRMET is cancelled, neither the original report nor the cance-
lation message can be displayed.
instructions on decoding textual AIRMETs.
SIGMET
A SIGMET (Significant Meteorological Information) is an advisory of non-
convective weather that is potentially hazardous to all aircraft. SIGMETs
address details regarding severe icing not associated with thunder-
FIS Operation
storms, severe or extreme turbulence not associated with thunderstorms,
Section 2
dust or sand storms lowering visibility to less than 3 miles, volcanic ash.
SIGMETs are considered widespread because they must either be
affecting or forecast to affect an area at least 3,000 square miles.
However, during the forecast period, the actual affected area may be
much smaller. SIGMETs are issued as needed and the maximum fore-
cast period is 4 hours, except for 6 hours for conditions associated with
hurricanes. A SIGMET will contain elements in the following order:
1. Forecast Area
2. Report Type
3. Date and time issued
4. Report designation and reason for issuance
5. Validity period
6. Area of coverage
7. Location of weather phenomenon
8. Weather phenomenon details.
These reports are displayed in an encoded textual format.
NOTE: SIGMETs older than the forecast period are discarded.

When an SIGMET is cancelled, neither the original report nor the cance-
lation message can be displayed.
instructions on decoding textual SIGMETs.
CONVECTIVE SIGMET
A Convective SIGMET (Convective Significant Meteorological
Information) is an advisory of convective weather that the forecaster
believes hazardous to all aircraft. Convective SIGMETs address details
regarding severe thunderstorms, embedded thunderstorms, a line of

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-10

thunderstorms, or thunderstorms producing heavy precipitation affecting
an area 40 percent or more of an area at least 3,000 square miles.
Convective SIGMETs are issued hourly with a maximum forecast period
of 2 hours. A Convective SIGMET will contain elements in the following
order:
1. Region Identifier and issue date and time
2. Report designator
3. Validity period
4. Area of coverage
5. Location details
FIS Operation
6. Weather phenomena details

Section 2
NOTE: Convective SIGMETs older than the forecast period are dis-
carded.
instructions on decoding textual Convective SIGMETs.
ALERT WEATHER WATCHES

Alert Weather Watches (AWW) are Alert Severe Weather Watch
Bulletins that describe areas of possible severe thunderstorm or tornado
development. These are watches, not warnings; and are issued as
needed. Severe weather may not actually develop. An Alert Weather
Watch will contain elements in the following order:
1. Report designation and date and time of issuance
2. Watch number, reason for issuance, area of coverage and validity
period.
3. Watch coordinates
4. Forecast
NOTE: Alert Weather Watches older than the forecast period are dis-
carded.
instructions on decoding textual Alert Weather Watches.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-11
Value Added Service Weather Products

VALUE ADDED SERVICE WEATHER PRODUCTS
The following is a discussion of weather products offered with the value
added, subscription service. Accessing and navigating these services
will be discussed in detail later in this section.
NEXRAD
Next Generation Radar (NEXRAD) is formally designated WSR-88D,
which stands for Weather Service Radar (Doppler) and was commis-
sioned in 1988.
FIS Operation
The NEXRAD base reflectivity mode provides a display of echo intensi-
Section 2
ty depicted by colors. NEXRAD information is good for identifying pre-
cipitation intensity.
This NEXRAD base reflectivity data product content consists of reflec-

tivity measured at the minimum scan angle of 0.5 degree elevation.
CAUTION: NEXRAD data must be used for strategic planning pur-

poses only. Due to inherent delays and relative age of the data
that can be experienced, NEXRAD data cannot be used for tactical
avoidance of weather.
NEXRAD Base Reflectivity images older than 75 minutes are dis-
carded and no longer displayed.
Figure 2-1 shows a typical NEXRAD display. Political boundaries,
rivers, lakes, and oceans are
depicted in conjunction with
weather.
The display range may be
changed to zoom in on a spe-
cific area to get a more
detailed weather picture, or
zoom out to display a wider
range.
Figure 2-1

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-12

NEXRAD ABNORMALITIES
The following is a list of NEXRAD abnormalities that may be experi-

enced:
1. Each NEXRAD site can operate in two modes, "Clear Air" mode or
"Precipitation" mode. When no significant precipitation exists in the
scanning area of the radar a NEXRAD site produces images in the
"Clear Air" mode. In this mode the radar is very sensitive to small tar-
gets, making it possible to detect minute particles such as pollen, smoke
and dust.
2. Ground clutter is detected when nearby buildings, trees, and towers
FIS Operation
reflect radar energy back to the NEXRAD site. Because NEXRAD is a

Section 2
Doppler radar, many stationary targets are filtered out. However, if a

tower or tree sways slightly in the wind, it will show up on the scan as a
target. These “moving” objects are the targets referred to as ground
clutter. Radar returns from very near the site (within a radius 20-30 nau-
tical miles) indicating very high reflectivities often include ground clutter.
3. Strobes are spurious radar data caused primarily by defractive
bending of the beam back down to the ground. This often happens in
areas where cool air interacts with prevailing warm air, such as along
coastlines and over oceans or other large bodies of water. Blocky and
linear features are characteristics of strobes within the displayed data.
4. Sun strobes occur when a radar antenna points directly at the sun.
This shows up as high reflectivity for one or two radials. Since base
reflectivity is scanned at the lowest antenna elevation angle (0.5
degrees) typically sun strobes appear only when the sun is rising or set-
ting. Sun strobes are shown as bright colored spikes on the display.
5. Military planes deploy metallic dust known as 'chaff' to diffuse their
radar signatures and mask their presence on radar. Pilots frequently
practice laying chaff trails over open ocean, although these trails often
drift over land causing alterations in weather radar scans.
6. When a solid object, such as a mountain, intersects a radar beam, it
blocks any reflectivity beyond that point and produces a shadow within
the display.
7. When a building near a NEXRAD site is taller than the tower on
which the radar antenna resides, it can block the beam, casting a long,
narrow shadow (blank space) in the display.
8. NEXRAD sites sometimes return data that is entirely spurious. This
is known as "going critical" and usually does not last longer than a few
hours.
9. Atmospheric temperature inversions cause radar returns from the
Earth's surface resulting in Anomalous Propagation (AP) echoes on the
radar display.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-13

10. Echoes from migrating birds, bats, and insects will be displayed as
circular patterns of level 1 reflectivity centered near NEXRAD sites.
11. Significant variation in humidity with altitude can cause reflections
from the Earth's surface. These reflections are also displayed as large
circular or oval areas of uniform low intensity.
NEXRAD LIMITATIONS
The following are limitations on the use of NEXRAD Base Reflectivity

data:
1. NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to
FIS Operation
determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics (hail vs. rain, etc.).
Section 2
2. The displayed NEXRAD base reflectivity product does not provide
sufficient detail to infer future weather trends. Due to delays involved in
product creation and transmittal, the pilot should always review the age
bar to determine information currency.
Coverage Gap
3. Due to site location limita-
tions, terrestrial blockages and
outages, NEXRAD coverage
gaps exist. Coverage gaps are
displayed as a cross hatched
pattern as shown in Figure 2-2.
Lack of reflectivity in a cov-
erage gap area should not be
construed as a lack of precipi-
tation.
4. NEXRAD base reflectivity
is sampled at the minimum Figure 2-2
antenna elevation angle. An
individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close
ranges, and has no information about storms directly over the site.
5. The resolution of NEXRAD data is 4 kilometers. Thus, when
zoomed in on the display, each square block is 4 kilometers in diameter.
The intensity level reflected by the square will be the highest level sam-
pled within the 4 kilometer area.
INTENSITY
Precipitation intensity is depicted using colors as follows:

Green Light Level 1 15-30 dBz
Yellow Moderate Level 2 30-40 dBz
Red Heavy Level 3-4 40-50 dBz
Magenta Intense Level 5-8 50+ dBz

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-14

Moving the joystick and
pressing the LEGEND Softkey
will display the NEXRAD
legend as shown in Figure 2-3.
The column labeled dBz is a
measure of the radar echo
intensity.
The strength of a radar return
signal typically varies as a
function of distance (i.e.,
weaker from distant targets, Figure 2-3
FIS Operation
stronger from those nearby)

Section 2
and the object size.

Many weather sources available on the internet use color coding that is
different than the KMD 250 color coding. The dBz and intensity level
can be used to compare intensity levels between different sources of
NEXRAD information since many internet weather providers will
include a legend with dBz values indicated.
No Data, as shown in the legend, indicates the lack of coverage for
reasons discussed previously.
GRAPHICAL METAR
The graphical METAR is
derived from the most cur-
rently received textual METAR
or SPECI data from reporting
sites. This is displayed on a
map background to enhance
situational awareness as
shown on Figure 2-4.
The graphical METAR icon is
gray (AGED) when the textual
METAR or SPECI report
exceeds 75 minutes, but is less Figure 2-4
than the textual METAR expira-
tion time of 120 minutes.
CAUTION: Graphical METAR data must be used for strategic plan-
ning purposes only. Due to inherent delays, areas of coverage
and relative age and availability of the data that can be experi-
enced, Graphical METAR data cannot be viewed as an absolute
depiction of conditions at a specific location.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-15

Graphical METARs are shown using two color coded boxes, one indi-
cating ceiling (upper box), the other visibility (lower box). Next to the
boxes is the ICAO station identifier for the airport to which the METAR
pertains. Color coding for the boxes is specified in the table below:
FIS Operation
Section 2
Moving the joystick pointer to
an area that will not highlight a
specific report then pressing
the LEGEND Softkey will dis-
play the graphical METAR
legend as shown in Figure 2-
5.
Figure 2-5

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-16

GRAPHICAL AIRMET
The graphical AIRMET is
derived from the location
description (if provided) in the
textual AIRMET and displayed
as a boundary box with the
appropriate color for the condi-
tion as shown in the legend
(for a description, see
AIRMETs in the Basic
Weather Services section). Figure 2-6
FIS Operation
The “IN” box in the legend indi-

Section 2
cates the current aircraft position is within the corresponding forecast

condition. The boundaries are displayed on a map background to
enhance situational awareness as shown on Figure 2-6. Low Level
Wind Shear and Freezing Level information will not be displayed on
the GRAPHICAL AIRMET; check the textual AIRMETs for this informa-
tion.
NOTE: If no location description is provided in the textual AIRMET the
AIRMET cannot be depicted graphically. These AIRMETs are denoted
by displaying the AIRMET identifier in green within the textual
AIRMET.
GRAPHICAL SIGMET
The graphical SIGMET is
derived from the location
description in the textual
SIGMET and displayed as a
boundary box with the appro-
priate color for the condition
(for a description, see
SIGMETs in the Basic
Weather Services section).
This is displayed on a map Figure 2-7
background to enhance situa-
tional awareness as shown on Figure 2-7.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-17

GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMET
The graphical Convective
SIGMET is derived from the
location description in the tex-
tual Convective SIGMET and
displayed as a yellow
boundary box (for a descrip-
tion, see CONVECTIVE
SIGMETs in the Basic
The “IN” box in the legend
FIS Operation
indicates the current aircraft
Section 2
position is within the corre-
sponding forecast condition. Figure 2-8
The boundaries are displayed on a map background to enhance situa-
tional awareness as shown on Figure 2-8.
GRAPHICAL ALERT WEATHER WATCHES

The graphical Alert Weather
Watches (AWWs) are derived
from the location description in
the textual AWW and dis-
played as a boundary box with
the appropriate color for the
condition as shown in the
legend (for a description, see
ALERT WEATHER
WATCHES in the Basic
The “IN” box in the legend
Figure 2-9
indicates the current aircraft
position is within the corresponding forecast condition. The boundaries
are displayed on a map background to enhance situational awareness
as shown on Figure 2-9.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-18
FIS Operation Value Added Service Weather Products

Section 2

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-19
FIS Subscriptions
FIS SUBSCRIPTIONS
Subscriptions are used to gain access to different services. Some ser-
vices are offered at no cost and others are fee based. A current FIS sub-
scription and a current data card is required to receive FIS services.
Obtaining a subscription can be performed via website,
(http://www.bendixking.com) select Wingman Services, Data Link
Weather, or alternatively by contacting Wingman Services at 800-247-
0230 (or 913-712-3145). During this process, you will have the option to
subscribe to fee-based products, such as NEXRAD, Graphical METARs,
Graphical AIRMETs, Graphical SIGMETs, Graphical Convective
FIS Operation
SIGMETs, Graphical AWWs and/or may choose to subscribe to basic
Section 2
textual products, such as TAFs, METARs/SPECIs, PIREPs, AIRMETs,
SIGMETs, Convective SIGMETs and AWWs, which are free-of-charge.
NOTE: Although the basic textual products are free of charge, they still
require a subscription as well as a current data card to receive the ser-
vice.
To accommodate users with varying service needs (for example, during
different flying seasons over the course of a year), the display unit allows
storage for up to four individual subscriptions, in much the same way that
a computer can support multiple user accounts with different passwords.
Once entered, the display unit manages selection of the appropriate sub-
scription without any operator intervention. A subscription code must be
entered into the display unit whenever you add or renew a subscription.
When subscribing for a FIS service package, you may specify the date
when service shall commence and the duration. If you subscribe to mul-
tiple packages, the start date and duration of each can differ (if desired).
For instance, a user may select the free text weather package for an
entire year and also choose a graphical weather package for part of the
year.
During the subscription process, you will receive 1 to 4 subscription
codes which you must enter into your display unit to permit access to all
products. A subscription code is an alphanumeric sequence that permits
access to the FIS broadcast network in much the same way that a com-
puter password permits access to a computer network. When you sub-
scribe for FIS services, the online system will ask for a FIS Display ID in
order to provide you with the subscription code. The FIS Display ID is a
unique alphanumeric serial number associated with your display unit.
This ID is obtained by viewing the FIS Subscription Status page on your
display unit. After obtaining the subscription code (from either
bendixking.com or via a phone call to Wingman Services), enter this
code into your display unit. The subscription code tells the display the
service(s) to which you have subscribed and for what period of time.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-20
FIS Subscriptions
Also, the data card must be updated at least once a year for continuance
of FIS subscription service. The validity period for the subscription data
on the data card is shown on the FIS Caution page at power on and also
on the FIS Subscription Status Page. The data card contains both sub-
scription data that is needed to access FIS products as well as the latest
operating software. By updating the data card at least once a year prior
to the expiration date you will ensure uninterrupted FIS service and also
have the latest version of software to utilize new FIS products as they
become available. Note that data card updates are available every 28
days and also include the latest version of Jeppesen navigation data.
Go to Bendixking.com Enter Display ID during

FIS Operation
Get Display ID or call 1-800-247-0230 registration

from unit in airplane (This is only required first
Section 2
to subscribe to FIS Services

time you subscribe)
Receive Subscription Take printed out code(s)

Select the desired Code(s) and print them to the airplane and enter
services out code(s) on the FIS Subscription
Status Page
Update Data Card if needed.

Update at least once per year Enjoy flying with FIS
to ensure continued FIS Services Services!
How to Subscribe to FIS Services

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-21
FIS Subscriptions
SETTING UP A FIS SUBSCRIPTION
At least one subscription must be set up, even to receive the no-charge
services. Up to four different concurrent subscriptions can be set up
depending on the service packages desired.
NOTE: Entering more than four subscriptions will cause previous sub-
scriptions to be overwritten.
To set up a subscription, perform the following steps:
FIS Operation
Section 2
Softkey to display the AUX-
MAIN MENU Page as shown
in Figure 2-11.
3. Turn the Rotary Knob or
move the Joystick to move the
cursor to select Fis
Subscriptions as shown in Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11.
to display the AUX-FIS SUB-
SCRIPTION Page as shown in
Figure 2-12. On initial sub-
scription setup the subscription
window will show only blank
spaces as shown in Figure 2-
12, unless services were pre-
provisioned at the factory. In
this case some lines may not
be blank. If adding another
subscription, one or more pre- Figure 2-11
vious subscriptions may be dis-
played with the associated
validity period and status.
The unique identifier for the
individual KMD 250 is dis-
played in the FIS DISPLAY ID
window. The unique ID shown
here is 0H100 11KSH.
Obtain the unique ID for your
system and visit the Wingman
Services website on
Figure 2-12

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-22
FIS Subscriptions
www.bendixking.com or call 1-
800-247-0230. This ID will be
used to obtain a Subscription
Code.
NOTE: For uninterrupted FIS
services, the data card must be
updated by the date shown in
“DATA CARD UPDATE
REQUIRED BY” field.
5. After obtaining the
Subscription Code, press the Figure 2-13
FIS Operation
ADD SUBSCR softkey to dis-

Section 2
play Figure 2-13

6. The Rotary Knob selects the
alphanumeric character and
the Joystick selects the char-
acter position. Turn the Rotary
Knob until the first character of
the Subscription Code is dis-
played in first space. Push the
Joystick to the right to move to
the next space to the right.
Turn the Rotary Knob until the
second character of the Figure 2-14
Subscription Code is displayed.
Continue this sequence until
the entire Subscription Code
has been entered as shown in
Figure 2-14.
After selecting the last char-
acter space of the Subscription
Code the ENTER Softkey will
be available.
7. After entering the last
Subscription Code character,
press the ENTER Softkey. The Figure 2-15
subscription should be accepted and processed as shown in Figure 2-
15.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-23
FIS Subscriptions
If an incorrect code has been
entered, a notification like that
shown in Figure 2-16 will be
displayed.
8. After the subscription has
been accepted, Figure 2-17 will
be displayed showing the sub-
scription validity period and
status. If the subscription has
been entered prior to the
beginning of subscription ser-
vice, the entered subscription Figure 2-16
FIS Operation
will begin when subscription
Section 2
services are turned on.
CHECKING FIS SUB-

SCRIPTIONS
To check FIS subscription
validity or status perform the
following steps:
1. Repeat steps 1 through 4 in
the Setting Up a FIS
Subscription section. Figure 2-17
2. A screen similar to Figure 2-17 should be displayed. In this case sub-
scription #1 is valid and no other subscriptions have been entered.
The symbols that may appear in the Status column, and their meanings,
are shown in Figure 2-18. Again, subscriptions will only be valid when
FIS subscription service is turned on.
Figure 2-18
NOTE: Only the validity period for subscriptions is shown on the display.
To determine which products are available with each subscription,
access the account on Wingman Services at www.bendixking.com.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-24
FIS Operation FIS Subscriptions

Section 2

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-25
Normal Operation
NORMAL OPERATION
To display the FIS pages, press the WX Function Select Key. Each
press will cycle through the FIS Graphics Page, FIS Text Page and
Stormscope® (if installed).
FIS Graphical
☞
FIS Operation
Products
Section 2
FIS Textual
Products
Stormscope®*
*Only if Stormscope® is installed
In the graphical weather products, each option can be

selected in one of two ways. The first is using the menu as
shown in the following steps:
2. Press the CHOOSE
PRODUCT Softkey to display
Figure 2-20.
3. Using the Rotary Knob or
Joystick, scroll to the desired
product and press the SELECT
Softkey.
This method allows for easily
moving between graphical and Figure 2-19
textual weather products. It
also makes it easy to quickly
identify any weather products
that have not been received by
the KMD 250. These will
appear “grayed out” and will
not be selectable.
The second method of
selecting options can be used
for cycling through only the
graphical products. If presently
viewing a graphic product dis- Figure 2-20
play, simply turn the Rotary
Knob. Each click will select the next graphic display.
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-26
Normal Operation
NOTE: The KMD 250 will only allow for selection and display of products
for which data has been received. If a desired product is not available, it
may be that the data has not yet been received or to which there is no
subscription.
NEXRAD PAGE
Press the WX Function Select Key until a FIS Graphics Page is dis-
played. Turn the Rotary Knob until NEXRAD Base Reflectivity is dis-
played. The following illustration describes the NEXRAD display.
3 4 5
FIS Operation
Section 2
2
8
11 10 9
displayed.
3 North Pointer
4 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position. Stylized airplane when
heading/track input is present, a plus symbol with no heading/track.
6 RESET STICK Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.
7 Precipitation - NEXRAD precipitation returns.
8 LEGEND Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick is moved.
9 Age of Data and Status Bar - The age of the data is displayed in minutes
based on current time minus the NEXRAD issue time. The colored bar
indicates percentage of age versus elapsed time before expiration. The bar
will be green the first 50% then turn yellow. Also, note in this example that
the maximum age allowed for the display of this data is 75 minutes.
10 Rotary Knob Active - When displayed on the graphical weather products
pages, rotating the knob will cycle through the products.
11 Current Selection - Displays the name of the weather product currently being
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-27
Normal Operation
NEXRAD PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS
CAUTION: NEXRAD data must only be used for strategic planning

purposes. Due to inherent delays and relative age of the data that
can be experienced, NEXRAD data cannot be used for tactical
avoidance of weather.
WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Graphical
Weather Products, Textual Weather Products and
Stormscope®.
Rotary Knob - Turning the Rotary Knob cycles
through the graphical NEXRAD, METAR, AIRMET,
FIS Operation
SIGMET, Convective SIGMET, Alert Weather Watches
Section 2
and FIS Network Status Pages.
Joystick - Moving the Joystick allows panning of the
map and placement of the pointer over the desired
weather activity to be viewed.
RNG▲/RNG▼ - Displays ZOOMING TO ### nm and
advances the indicator to the next range. The upper button
increases range, the lower button decreases it. The
selected range is displayed in the lower left corner of the
display with the outer range ring the displayed range and
the inner range ring is half the displayed range.
USING THE NEXRAD PAGE

1. Press the WX Function
Select Key until the FIS
Graphics Page is displayed. If
necessary, turn the Rotary
Knob to obtain the NEXRAD
Base Reflectivity display as
NEXRAD Base Reflectivity
will be displayed at the bottom
of the display.
NOTE: If a notification such as
that shown in Figure 2-22 is Figure 2-21
displayed, it may be that the
system has not had time to acquire a signal or has acquired a signal and
not yet received all the data for a NEXRAD image. If this notification is
still present after a few minutes, while in an area of expected coverage,
refer to the FIS NOTIFICATIONS in this section.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-28
Normal Operation
Always make note of the age of
the data displayed in the
bottom right corner (see Figure
2-21). Remember, the older
the age the more suspect the
accuracy of the data. The col-
ored bar will be green the first
50% of the expiration time
period for the displayed data
then turn yellow. Also, delays
occurring prior to the weather
distributor time stamping the Figure 2-22
data are not reflected in the dis-
FIS Operation
Section 2
played age. These delays can

range from one to seven min-
utes.
If no data update has been

received for 75 minutes the
NEXRAD image is discarded
and no longer displayed.
2. Press the RNG▲ /RNG▼

Key to zoom in or out on the
display. The map is centered Figure 2-23
on the present position indi-
cated by the symbolic aircraft.
3. To view a specific area of

weather, move the joystick in
the desired direction. A pointer
will appear on the display (see
Figure 2-23). The distance and
bearing between present posi-
tion and the pointer is shown at
the bottom of the display. As
the joystick is held the pointer
will continue to move. When Figure 2-24
the pointer reaches the edge of the display the map will pan to keep up
with pointer movement. Release the joystick to stop moving the pointer.
Press the RNG▲/RNG▼ keys to zoom in or out on the pointer position.
Pressing the LEGEND Softkey will display the NEXRAD LEGEND as in

Figure 2-24. Press the CLEAR Softkey to clear the legend from the dis-
play.
Press the RESET STICK Softkey to return to the present position dis-
play. If no actions are taken for a period of 30 seconds, the display will
return to the present position.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-29
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE
played. Turn the Rotary Knob until Graphical METARs is displayed.
The following illustration describes the Graphical METARs display.
3 4 5
FIS Operation
6
Section 2
7
8
2
9
12 11 10
displayed.
3 North Pointer
7 Graphical METAR Icon - Ceiling indicated in top box, visibiliy in bottom box
and ICAO identifier of issuing airport. Note that ICAO identifiers are not
displayed on all range settings.
8 MORE INFO Soft Label - Displayed when the Joystick Pointer is positioned
over a METAR Icon. Pressing this Softkey will display more information.
10 METAR Color Key - Colors indicating flight rules pertaining to ceiling and
visibility.
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-30
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

Stormscope®.
FIS Operation

Section 2

USING THE GRAPHICAL METARS PAGE

Knob to obtain the Graphical
METAR display similar to
Figure 2-25. Graphical
METARs will be displayed at
the bottom of the display.
NOTE: This page will not be
accessible until a valid FIS
signal has been acquired and Figure 2-25
processed by the system.
2. Press the RNG▲/RNG▼ Key to zoom in on the display. The map is

centered on the present position indicated by the symbolic aircraft.
3. To view a specific METAR, move the joystick in the desired direction.

A pointer will appear on the display. The distance and bearing between
present position and the pointer is shown at the bottom center of the dis-
play (see Figure 2-26). As the joystick is held the pointer will continue to
move. When the pointer reaches the edge of the display the map will
pan to keep up with pointer movement. Release the joystick to stop
moving the pointer. When the pointer moves over a graphical METAR
icon, a box will pop up containing the IDENT, NAME and CITY/STATE
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-31
Normal Operation
pertaining to the location and
the AGE of the report (see
Figure 2-27).

keys to zoom in or out on the
pointer position.
5. Press the MORE INFO

Softkey to display the Text
METAR Page for the displayed
location as in Figure 2-28. Figure 2-26
FIS Operation
Section 2
6. Press the RETURN TO
MAP Softkey to return to the
previous display.
7. Press the RESET STICK

Softkey to return to the present
position display. If no actions
are taken for a period of 30
seconds, the display will return
to the aircraft present position
display. Figure 2-27
8. To view the GRAPHICAL
METAR LEGEND, move the
joystick pointer to an area with
no icons and press the
LEGEND Softkey. The legend
will be displayed as in Figure 2-
29. Press the CLEAR Softkey
to remove the legend from the
display.
Figure 2-28
Figure 2-29

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-32
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE
played. Turn the Rotary Knob until AIRMETs is displayed. The fol-
lowing illustration describes the AIRMETs display.
3 4 5
6
FIS Operation
Section 2
7
8
2
9
13 12 11 10
displayed.
3 North Pointer
7 AIRMET Boundary - Color coded line indicating the boundaries of an AIRMET.
over an AIRMET boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more
information.
10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicate the type of weather phenomenon.
11 IN - Indicates the current aircraft position is “IN” a turbulence AIRMET.
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-33
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL AIRMETS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

Stormscope®.
FIS Operation
Section 2
USING THE GRAPHICAL

AIRMETS PAGE
AIRMETs display similar to
Figure 2-30. AIRMETs will be
displayed at the bottom of the Figure 2-30
display.
signal has been acquired and

Key to zoom in on the display.
The map is centered on the
present position indicated by
the symbolic aircraft.
3. To view a specific AIRMET, Figure 2-31

move the joystick in the desired
direction and place the pointer on the desired AIRMET border (see
Figure 2-31). A box will pop up containing the AIRMET designator,
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-34
Normal Operation
TYPE and the AGE of the
report.

pointer position.

AIRMET Page for the dis-
played location as in Figure 2-
32.
Figure 2-32
FIS Operation
Section 2

previous display.

display.
8. To view the AIRMET Figure 2-33

LEGEND, move the joystick to
display the LEGEND Softkey. Press the LEGEND Softkey and the
legend will be displayed as in Figure 2-33. Press the CLEAR Softkey to
remove the legend from the display.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-35
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE
played. Turn the Rotary Knob until SIGMETs is displayed. The following
illustration describes the SIGMETs display.
4 5 6
FIS Operation
Section 2
3
8
2
9
12 11 10
displayed.
3 SIGMET Boundary - Color coded line indicating the boundaries of a SIGMET.
4 North Pointer
over a SIGMET boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more
information.
10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicate the type of weather phenomenon.
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-36
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL SIGMETS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

Stormscope®.
FIS Operation

Section 2

USING THE GRAPHICAL

SIGMETS PAGE
SIGMETs display similar to
Figure 2-34. SIGMETs will be
displayed at the bottom of the
Figure 2-34
display.
signal has been acquired and

3. To view a specific SIGMET,

Figure 2-35
move the joystick in the desired
direction and place the pointer on the desired SIGMET border (see

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-37
Normal Operation
Figure 2-35). A box will pop up
containing the SIGMET desig-
nator, TYPE and the AGE of
the report.

pointer position.

SIGMET Page for the dis- Figure 2-36
played location as in Figure 2-
FIS Operation
Section 2
36.

previous display.

8. To view the SIGMET LEGEND, move the joystick to display the

LEGEND Softkey. Press the LEGEND Softkey and the legend will be
displayed as in Figure 2-37. Press the CLEAR Softkey to remove the
legend from the display.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-38
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE
played. Turn the Rotary Knob until Convective SIGMETs is displayed.
The following illustration describes the Convective SIGMETs display.
4 5 6
FIS Operation
7
Section 2
8
2
9
12 11 10
displayed.
3 Convective SIGMET Boundary - Yellow line indicates the boundaries of a
Convective SIGMET.
4 North Pointer
over a boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more information.
10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicating type of weather phenomenon.
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-39
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL CONVECTIVE SIGMETS PAGE OPERATIONAL
CONTROLS
WX Function Select Key - Cycles through Stormscope®,

Graphical Weather Products and Textual Weather
Products.
FIS Operation
Section 2
USING THE GRAPHICAL

CONVECTIVE SIGMETS
PAGE
Convective SIGMETs display
similar to Figure 2-38.
Convective SIGMETs will be Figure 2-38
displayed at the bottom of the
display.
NOTE: This page will not be accessible until a valid FIS signal has been
acquired and processed by the system.


KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-40
Normal Operation
3. To view a specific
Convective SIGMET, move the
joystick in the desired direction
and place the pointer on the
desired Convective SIGMET
border (see Figure 2-39). A
box will pop up containing the
Convective SIGMET desig-
nator, TYPE and the AGE of
the report.

Figure 2-39
FIS Operation
Section 2
pointer position.

Convective SIGMET Page for
the displayed location as in
Figure 2-40.

previous display.
7. Press the RESET STICK Figure 2-40

display.
8. To view the CONV SIGMET

LEGEND, move the joystick to
display the LEGEND Softkey.
Press the LEGEND Softkey
and the legend will be dis-
played as in Figure 2-41. Press Figure 2-41
the CLEAR Softkey to remove
the legend from the display.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-41
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL WEATHER WATCHES PAGE (AWW)
played. Turn the Rotary Knob until WEATHER WATCHES (AWW) is
displayed. The following illustration describes the Weather Watches dis-
play.
4 5 6
FIS Operation
7
Section 2
3
8
2
9
12 11 10
displayed.
3 Weather Watch Boundary - Color coded line indicates the boundaries and
type of Weather Watch.
4 North Pointer
over a boundary line. Pressing this Softkey will display more information.
10 Boundary Color Key - Colors indicating type of weather phenomenon.
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-42
Normal Operation
GRAPHICAL WEATHER WATCHES PAGE OPERATIONAL
CONTROLS

Stormscope®.
FIS Operation

Section 2

USING THE GRAPHICAL

WEATHER WATCHES
PAGE
Weather Watches display sim-
ilar to Figure 2-42. Weather
Watches (AWW) will be dis- Figure 2-42
played at the bottom of the dis-
play.
NOTE: This page will not be accessible until a valid FIS signal has been
acquired and processed by the system.


KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:35 PM Page 2-43
Normal Operation
3. To view a specific Weather
Watch, move the joystick in the
desired direction and place the
pointer on the desired Weather
Watch border (see Figure 2-
43). A box will pop up con-
taining the Weather Watch des-
ignator, TYPE and the AGE of
the report.

keys to zoom in or out on the Figure 2-43
pointer position.
FIS Operation
Section 2
Weather Watch Page for the
displayed location as in Figure
2-44.

previous display.

Softkey to return to the present Figure 2-44
display.
8. To view the Wx WATCH

(AWW) LEGEND, move the
joystick to display the LEGEND
Softkey. Press the LEGEND
Softkey and the legend will be
displayed as in Figure 2-45.
Press the CLEAR Softkey to Figure 2-45
remove the legend from the dis-
play.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-44
Normal Operation
FIS NETWORK STATUS PAGE
The FIS Network Status Page displays the location and identifier of
installed ground stations. This page can also be used to determine
which stations are being received and the status of each station.
The following illustration describes the FIS Network Status Page display.
3 4 5
FIS Operation
Section 2
7
2

10 9 8
displayed.
3 North Pointer
7 FIS Station Icon - Color coded icon indicates station location and status. The
“starburst” indicates station currently being received.
8 Color Key - Ground station status legend.
UNKNOWN indicates the station status is unknown. If network status information
has not been recently received, all sites will be shown as UNKNOWN in white
at their last known location.
OK indicates the station is broadcasting current information.
CHECK AGE indicates the station is operating, but may not be broadcasting
the most recent information. Check the age of the data before using.
OFFLINE indicates the station is known to be offline.
viewed.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-45
Normal Operation
FIS NETWORK STATUS PAGE OPERATIONAL CONTROLS

Stormscope®.
FIS Operation
Section 2
USING THE FIS NET-

WORK STATUS PAGE
Knob to obtain the FIS Network
Status display similar to Figure
2-46. FIS Network Status will
be displayed at the bottom of Figure 2-46
the display.

3. To view a specific FIS

Network station move the joy-
stick in the desired direction
and place the pointer on the
desired station icon (see Figure
2-47). A box will pop up con- Figure 2-47
taining the FIS TRANSMITTER IDENTIFIER and STATUS.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-46
Normal Operation
4. Press the RESET STICK Softkey to return to the present position dis-
play. If no actions are taken for a period of 30 seconds, the display will
return to the aircraft present position display.
NOTE: At any given moment the FIS receiver may not be receiving the
closest transmitting site. This is not a problem since all stations transmit
the same data.
Visit Wingman Services at www.bendixking.com to view the latest infor-
mation about network transmitter locations and to cross-reference
ground station IDs with the location names.
FIS Operation
Section 2

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-47
Normal Operation
FIS TEXTUAL WEATHER PRODUCTS
The following illustration describes the FIS Textual Products display.
5 6 7 8
9
4
3 10
FIS Operation
11
Section 2
2 12
13
1
14
1 Report Range - RNG:####. Pressing the RNG▲/RNG▼ Key will change the
distance radius from the selected FILTER AREA in which available reports will
be listed. In this case all available METARs with a 50 mile radius of KJHW
will be listed in the AVAILABLE METARS field.
2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available (black)
and displayed (color).
3 Selected Report Info - Displays identifier, name, city and state of selected
report. This field is only display for METARs, TAFs and PIREPs.
4 Available Reports - Shows available reports based on the selection
in the FILTER AREA field. Special, urgent or amended reports are
highlighted in yellow. Horizontal movement of the joystick will move the
cursor over the next report in the field. The presence of a scroll bar
indicates more reports are available, but not displayed.
5 Filter Area Selection - Pressing the CHANGE AREA Softkey cycles
between Destination, Flightplan WPT, Nearest and User Defined.
6 Knob Active - When displayed, the Rotary Knob can be used to select
an identifier from the database or Flightplan. This is only available when
User Defined or FPL WPT is selected.
7 Selected Identifier - Indicates the currently selected identifier.
8 UTC - Current UTC time.
9 METAR MAP Softlabel - In this case, when this key is pressed the graphical
METAR page is displayed with the map centered on the selected METAR.
This softkey corresponds to the currently selected textual product, i.e
METAR MAP. This is only available when valid data is being received.
10 Change Area Softlabel - Cycles the FILTER AREA field between
Destination, Flightplan Waypoint (FPL WPT), Nearest and User Defined.
11 Text Field - The encoded weather report is displayed in this field.
12 CHOOSE PRODUCT Softlabel - Pressing this softkey will display the
SELECT WX PRODUCT window. Use the Rotary Knob or Joystick to
highlight the desired product and press SELECT.
13 Current Selected - Indicates the currently selected weather product.
14 Age of Report- Age of report based on UTC time minus time of report.
The colored bar indicates percentage of age versus elapsed time before
expiration. The bar will be green the first 50% then turn yellow.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-48
Normal Operation
FIS TEXTUAL PRODUCTS OPERATIONAL CONTROLS
Stormscope®.
MAP Softkey - Depending on which tex-
tual product is currently being viewed, this
softkey will be labeled for corresponding
graphical product page. For example, if
viewing the textual METAR page this softkey will be labeled METAR
MAP as shown here. If viewing the textual AIRMETs page this softkey
will be labeled AIRMET MAP and so on.
FIS Operation
NOTE: If no location description is provided in the textual AIRMET the

Section 2
AIRMET cannot be depicted graphically. These AIRMETs are denoted

by displaying the AIRMET identifier in green within the textual
AIRMET. Also, the AIRMET MAP Softkey will not be available.
CHANGE AREA Softkey - Pressing the
CHANGE AREA softkey will cycle
through the four options available for the
FILTER AREA field in the upper part of
the display. Available selections are Destination, Nearest, FPL WPT
and User Defined. The closest available weather reports for the
selected FILTER AREA will be displayed in the AVAILABLE reports
field.
CHOOSE PRODUCT Softkey - Pressing
the CHOOSE PRODUCT softkey will dis-
play the SELECT WX PRODUCT
window. Use the Rotary Knob or Joystick
to highlight the desired weather product.
Rotary Knob/Joystick - These may be used to high-
light the desired weather product in the SELECT WX
PRODUCT window. The Rotary Knob may also be
used to scroll through flightplan waypoints and enter
airport identifiers.
SELECT Softkey - After highlighting the

desired weather product in the SELECT
WX PRODUCT window, pressing the
SELECT Softkey will display the chosen
weather product.
RNG▲/RNG▼ Keys - The KMD 250 displays all textual
weather product reports available within a specified radius
of the selection made in the FILTER AREA. This specified
radius can be changed by pressing the RNG▲/RNG▼
Keys.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-49
Normal Operation
USING THE FIS TEXT
PAGE
Press the WX Function Select
Key until the FIS Textual Page
is displayed as shown in Figure
2-48.
NOTE: If a notification such as
that shown in Figure 2-49 is
displayed, it may be that the
system has not had time to
acquire a signal. If this notifi- Figure 2-48
FIS Operation
cation is still present after a few
Section 2
minutes, refer to the FIS NOTI-
FICATIONS section of this sec-
tion.
If no METAR is available in the
selected area, a notification
such as that shown in Figure 2-
50 will be displayed.
The example displayed in
Figure 2-48 is a METAR report
for KIXD, which was selected Figure 2-49
as a User Defined area.
Press the METAR MAP
Softkey to display the graphical
METAR for the KIXD as shown
in Figure 2-51. Press the
MORE INFO Softkey to return
the textual report.
The METAR MAP Softkey will
change depending on the
selected weather product. In
this case a METAR is being Figure 2-50
viewed so the label displays
METAR MAP. If viewing an
AIRMET, the label would show
AIRMET MAP and so on. In
short, pressing this softkey will
display the graphical weather
product for the appropriate tex-
tual weather product selected.
NOTE: See Appendix B for a
list of common weather abbre-
viations.
Figure 2-51
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-50
Normal Operation
CHANGING WEATHER
PRODUCTS
1. Press the CHOOSE

PRODUCT Softkey to display
the SELECT WX PRODUCT
window as shown in Figure 2-
52.
2. Turn the Rotary Knob or

move the Joystick up or down
to highlight the desired weather Figure 2-52
FIS Operation
product.
Section 2
3. Press the SELECT Softkey.

If a Graphical Weather Product
is selected, refer to that partic-
ular Graphical Weather
Products section for operation.
4. If desired, press the

RNG▲/RNG▼ Keys to change
the reporting radius for the
selected FILTER AREA. The
default distance for METARs is Figure 2-53
50nm and TAFs is 100nm. All
others are 150nm. The user
selected distance can be from
50 to 300nm.
Note that in Figure 2-53,

METARs have been selected
with the default RNG of 50nm.
In this example all METAR
reports within 50nm of the User
Defined location of KJHW are
listed in the AVAILABLE
METARS field. The scroll bar
indicates not all reports are dis- Figure 2-54
played. Move the Joystick to the right to select the different reports.
In Figure 2-54 the RNG▲ Key has been used to change the report RNG
to 150nm. Note that more reports are now in the AVAILABLE METARS
field due to selecting the larger 150nm radius.
The AVAILABLE METARS field (or TAFS, PIREPS, etc.) lists closest
first, furthest last. For instance, the display shown in Figure 2-53 lists all
available METARs within 50nm of KJHW (the selected FILTER AREA).

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-51
Normal Operation
KJHW is also a reporting station which is listed first in the AVAILABLE
METARS field. Use the joystick to scroll through the AVAILABLE
METARS. Urgent, special or amended reports will be highlighted in
yellow.
Note that the displayed report in Figure 2-54 is 12 minutes old. The bar
indicates a percentage of time left before expiration. The bar will be
green the first 50%, then turn yellow.
CHANGING FILTER AREA
1. Press the CHANGE AREA Softkey to view either Nearest to present
FIS Operation
position, a User Defined location, the Destination (last waypoint in a
Section 2
flightplan) or FPLN WPT (any waypoint in an active flightplan). The
softkey cycles through the FILTER AREAs as shown in Figure 2-55.
Destination
☞ Flightplan
☞ Nearest
☞ User
Waypoint Defined
☞
Figure 2-55
These four selectable areas are used to make it easier to find all the
reports near a specific location without having to know the exact identifier
of the reporting station.
Scanning Flightplan
Waypoints
If FPLN WPT is selected in the

FILTER AREA field (as shown
in Figure 2-56), the Rotary
Knob can be used to sequence
through all the waypoints on
the active flightplan. The next
waypoint from the current posi-
tion will be displayed.
Figure 2-56
Turn the Rotary Knob clockwise
to sequence forward through the waypoints. Turn the Rotary Knob
counter-clockwise to sequence backward through the waypoints.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-52
Normal Operation
Finding User Defined Areas
by Identifier
If User Defined has been

selected, as in Figure 2-57, use
the following procedure to
change the location.
1. Turn the Rotary Knob to dis-

play the USER DEFINED
AREA ENTRY window as
shown in Figure 2-58. The Figure 2-57
FIS Operation
identifier previously selected is

Section 2
displayed with the appropriate

name and city. Note the first
character in the IDENT field is
highlighted. Turn the Rotary
Knob to change this character.
2. Move the Joystick to the
right to highlight the next char-
acter as seen in Figure 2-59.
Again, turn the Rotary Knob to
change the character.
Continue changing each char-
acter in this manner until the Figure 2-58
desired identifier is entered.
3. After entering the desired
the identifier, press the OK
Softkey. The selected weather
product will now be displayed
for the new User Defined area.
Finding User Defined Areas

by Name or City
When the identifier of the

desired location is known, the Figure 2-59
method previously described
can be used to select it. However, if the identifier is not known, the name
of the location can be entered. The system will also allow entry of just
the first few characters of the location name to help find it in the data-
base. If neither the identifier nor the location name is known, the
city/state can be scanned.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-53
Normal Operation
To Enter Location Name:
The following example shows
entering MONTROSE REGL
as a location.
1. Turn the Rotary Knob to dis-

play the USER DEFINED
2. Move the Joystick down to Figure 2-60
highlight the first character of
FIS Operation
Section 2
the location name as shown in
Figure 2-60.
3. Turn the Rotary Knob coun-
terclockwise until an M is
selected as shown in Figure 2-
61.
acter as seen in Figure 2-62.
5. Turn Rotary Knob clockwise
until an O is selected. Continue Figure 2-61
moving the cursor and entering
characters until MONTROSE is
displayed.
Figure 2-62

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-54
Normal Operation
6. Press the KNOB SCAN
Softkey and Figure 2-63 will be
displayed.
click clockwise. The first occur-
ance of names starting with
Montrose in the database is
now displayed as in Figure 2-
64.
scan through the database until Figure 2-63
FIS Operation
the desired name is displayed

Section 2
as in Figure 2-65.
view the selected weather
product for MONTROSE
REGL.
To Enter Location by City:
A location may be selected by
first entering the city using the
same method as entering the
location name. Figure 2-64
1. After entering the city, press
the KNOB SCAN Softkey.
2. Turning the Rotary Knob will
scan through the database dis-
playing each entry for the city
of Montrose.
3. Press the OK Softkey when
the desired location is dis-
played.
Figure 2-65

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-55
Normal Operation
To Scan for Location Name:
Sometimes, only a portion of
the airport name may come to
mind. The following example
shows scanning for EAGLE
GROVE MUN when EAGLE is
the only portion of the name
remembered.
1. If necessary press the
CHANGE AREA Softkey to
select User Defined in the Figure 2-66
FIS Operation
FILTER AREA.
Section 2
display the USER DEFINED
3. Move the Joystick down to
highlight the first the character
of the location name as shown
in Figure 2-67.
4. Turn the Rotary Knob coun-
terclockwise until an E is Figure 2-67
selected as shown in Figure 2-
68.
Figure 2-68

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-56
Normal Operation
acter space as seen in Figure
2-69.
6. Turn Rotary Knob clockwise
until an A is selected as in
Figure 2-70. Continue moving
the cursor and entering charac-
ters until EAGLE is displayed.
7. Press the KNOB SCAN
Softkey and Figure 2-71 will be Figure 2-69
FIS Operation
displayed.
Section 2

sequence through all the loca-
tion names in the database
beginning with EAGLE. stop-
ping at the desired name as in
Figure 2-72.
select EAGLE GROVE MUN
as the User Defined area.
Figure 2-70
NOTE: This same method
may be used with the name of
the city where the airport is
located.
This method is also used to
choose the desired airport
among those of identical
names, but located in different
cities.
Figure 2-71
Figure 2-72
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-57
FIS Notifications
FIS NOTIFICATIONS
The following are descriptions of FIS notifications that may be displayed.
(GRAPHICAL PRODUCT) DATA HAS NOT BEEN

RECEIVED
If no valid graphical product
data is received (in this case
NEXRAD) a notification such
as that shown in Figure 2-73
will be displayed.
FIS Operation
This notification usually means
Section 2
that the system is not in FIS
coverage or there is no sub-
scription set up for the Value
Added Product selected.
The notification can also occur Figure 2-73
while in FIS coverage if not all
of the data for a weather product has been received.
NO METARS AVAILABLE IN SELECTED AREA

A notification such as that
shown in Figure 2-74 will be
displayed if no METARs are
available in the selected area.
This notification means that the
FIS system is working properly,
there are simply no reports of
the selected mode within the
area.
NO METARS AVAIL- Figure 2-74

ABLE, DATA NOT
RECEIVED
This notification will be dis-
played (Figure 2-75) if no
METAR data has been
received.
This notification means the FIS
system has not received any
METAR data. This may be
due to not being in FIS cov-
erage. Figure 2-75

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-58
FIS Notifications
INVALID SUBSCRIPTION CODE. PLEASE CHECK AND
RE-ENTER CODE
This notification will be dis-
played (Figure 2-76) if an
invalid Subscription Code is
entered. This may be due to
an error entering the
Subscription Code. Also, it
may be due to a Subscription
Code being entered that is
associated with a different
FIS Operation
Display ID.
Section 2
Figure 2-76

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-59
Understanding Weather Reports

UNDERSTANDING TEXTUAL AVIATION
WEATHER REPORTS
UNDERSTANDING METARS
Refer to the numbers on the following diagram to find the appropriate
descriptions.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
METAR KPIT 201955Z AUTO 22015G25KT 3/4SM R28R/2600FT TSRA OVC010CB

18/16 A2992 RMK SLPO13 T01760158 PK WND 22030/15
FIS Operation
9 10 11
Section 2
1. Type of Report: METAR (SPECI will be seen here if this is a Special
Weather Report)
2. ICAO Station Identifier: KPIT

This is the location for which the METAR pertains.
3. Date and Time of Issue: 201955Z
The 20th day of the month at 1955Zulu or UTC.
4. AUTO indicates the reporting station is an automated station. If the
reporting station is a manned station this element will be omitted.
Also, if a report from an automated station is modified by a person
this element will be omitted. “COR” indicates a corrected report.
5. Wind: 22015G25KT
220 is the 3 digit true direction to the nearest 10°. Airport advisory
service, ATIS and ATC towers report wind direction as magnetic.
“VRB” in this place indicates variable winds less than or equal to 6
knots. If wind direction is varying more than 60° with speeds over 6
knots, an entry similar to “180V260” will be displayed in this place.
This example actually shows wind direction varying by 80°.
15 is the 2 or 3 digit wind speed (in knots).
25 is the 2 or 3 digit wind gust speed in knots (KT) because it follows a
G (Gust).
6. Visibility: 3/4SM R28R/2600FT
3/4 indicates 3/4 statute mile (SM) visibility.
Runway Visual Range (RVR) for R28R (runway 28 right) is 2600 feet
(2600FT). An “M” in this distance number indicates visibility is less
than the lowest reportable sensor value. A “P” indicates visibility is
greater than the highest reportable sensor value.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-60

NOTE: Only reported at those locations with certified RVR reporting
capability.
7. Significant Present Weather: TSRA
TS is a two letter designation for thunderstorm. Other possible des-
ignations could be as follows:
BC Patches
BL Blowing
DR Low Drifting
FZ Supercooled/Freezing
MI Shallow
PR Partial
FIS Operation
Section 2
SH Showers
The second two letter designator, RA, indicates moderate rain.
Moderate is indicated by the absence of a “+”, “-” or “VC” preceding
the designation. These preceding designations represent the fol-
lowing:
+ Heavy
- Light
VC In the vicinity
Other possible designations could be as follows:
BR Mist
DS Dust Storm
DU Widespread Dust
DZ Drizzle
FC Funnel Cloud
+FC Tornado/Water Spout
FG Fog
FU Smoke
GR Hail
GS Small Hail/Snow Pellets
HZ Haze
IC Ice Crystals
PE Ice Pellets
PO Dust/Sand Whirls
PY Spray
SA Sand
SG Snow Grains
SN Snow
SQ Squall
SS Sandstorm
UP Unknown Precipitation (Automated Observations)
VA Volcanic Ash

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-61

8. Sky Condition: OVC010CB
OVC indicates the sky is overcast. Cloud cover is based on the sky
being divided into eighths or octas. Overcast means the sky is 8
octas covered. The cloud cover designators are as follows:
SKC Sky Clear
CLR Clear below 12,000 ft. (automated observing systems)
FEW 1-2 Octas
SCT 3-4 Octas
BKN 5-7 Octas
OVC 8 octas
“VV” may also be encountered here indicating an indefinite ceiling.
FIS Operation
For example, VV004 would indicate a vertical visibility of 400 feet.
Section 2
010 indicates clouds are at 1000 feet.
CB denotes cloud type is cumulonimbus. “TCU” is another possible
designator meaning towering cumulus. CI is cirrus.
9. Temperature/Dew Point: 18/16
18 indicated the temperature is 18° Celsius. An “M” preceding the
temperature means the temperature is below 0° Celsius.
16 indicated the dew point is 16° Celsius. An “M” preceding the dew
point means the dew point is below 0° Celsius.
10. Altimeter Setting: A2992
A indicates the setting is in inches of mercury.
2992 is the altimeter setting. The first two digits are inches and the
second two are hundredths.
11. Remarks: RMK SLP013 T01760158 PK WND 22030/15
RMK designates the beginning of the remarks. Remarks can con-
tain anything, but often include the following:
SLP indicates sea level pressure in millibars from selected stations.
013 indicates pressure is 1001.3 millibars.
T01760158. Selected stations may also include a 9 place code indi-
cating temperature and dewpoint to the nearest 1/10 degree. T
denotes temperature. 0 indicates temperature is above 0° Celsius.
A “1” in this position indicates a temperature below 0° Celsius. 176
indicates a temperature of 17.6° Celsius. The next 0 indicates the
dew point is above 0° Celsius. A “1” in this position indicates a dew
point below 0° Celsius. 158 indicates a dewpoint of 15.8° Celsius.
PK WND 22030/15. Selected stations may include peak wind obser-
vations which will appear in the remarks element.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-62

PK WND denotes peak wind.
200 indicates wind direction from 200°.
30/15 indicates a maximum instantaneous wind of 30 knots occurred
at 15 minutes past the hour.
UNDERSTANDING TAFS
Refer to the numbers on the following diagram to find the appropriate
descriptions.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FIS Operation
Section 2
TAF KPIT 091730Z 091818 22020KT 3SM -SHRA BKN020
FM2030 30015G25KT 3SM SHRA OVC015 WS015/30045KT 20

19 TEMPO 2022 1/2SM TSRA OVC008CB
FM0100 27008KT 5SM -SHRA BKN020 OVC040 PROB40 0407 21

00000KT 1SM -RA BR
10
9 FM1000 22010KT 5SM -SHRA OVC020 BECMG 1315 20010KT
P6SM NSW SKC
16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15
1. Type of Report: TAF

TAF indicates a Terminal Area Forecast. TAF AMD indicates an
amended forecast.
2. ICAO Station Identifier: KPIT
This is the airport for which the TAF pertains.
3. Date and Time of Issue: 091730Z
The 9th day of the month at 1730Zulu or UTC.
4. Date and Time Valid: 091818
The 9th day of the month, valid for 24 hours from 091800Z to
101800Z. An amended forecast (TAF AMD) will be valid for only the
time interval remaining, usually less than 24 hours.
5. Forecast Wind: 22020KT
See #5 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details.
6. Forecast Visibility: 3SM
See #6 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details,
except RVR is not included in a TAF

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-63

7. Forecast Weather Phenomenon: -SHRA
8. Sky Conditions: BKN020
9. Beginning of Changed Forecast Conditions: FM1000
FM denotes “from” and 1000 indicates 1000Z. “From” means a sig-
nificant change in prevailing conditions is expected. The described
conditions follow this element and supercede all previous forecast
conditions.
10. Forecast Wind: 22010KT
FIS Operation
Section 2
11. Forecast Visibility: 5SM
12. Forecast Weather Phenomenon: -SHRA
13. Forecast Sky Conditions: OVC020
14. Change in Conditions: BECMG 1315
BECMG indicates “becoming” over the time interval between 1300Z
(13) and 1500Z (15). “Becoming” describes a gradual change in
forecast conditions. The described conditions follow this element
and supercede previously reported like elements.
15. Wind Becoming: 20010KT
See #5 in the UNDERSTANDING METARs section for details. This
element may be omitted if no change is expected.
16. Visibility Becoming: P6SM
17. Weather Phenomenon Becoming: NSW
NSW indicates “No Significant Weather”. See #7 in the UNDER-
STANDING METARs section for details.
18. Sky Conditions Becoming: SKC
19. Change in Conditions: TEMPO 2022
TEMPO indicates “temporary” changes expected as described
between 2000Z (20)and 2200Z (22). “Temporary” indicates a tem-
porary fluctuation in conditions, usually lasting less than one hour.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-64

The described conditions follow this element.
20. Low Level Windshear: WS015/30045KT
WS indicates “windshear” not associated with convective activity.
015 indicates the windshear is expected at 1500 feet. AGL Wind is
expected from 300° (300) at 45 knots (45KT).
21. Change in Conditions: PROB40 0407
PROB40 indicates a 40% “probability” of described conditions
occurring between 0400Z (04)and 0700Z (07). The described condi-
tions follow this element.
FIS Operation
UNDERSTANDING PIREPS
Section 2
The following is an example of a typical PIREP with an explanation of the

elements.
1 2 3
KCRW UA/OV KBKW 360015-KCRW/TM 1815/FL120/TP BE99/SK IMC/

WX RA/TA M08/WV 290030/TB LGT-MDT/IC LGT RIME/RM MDT MXD
ICG DURGC KROA NWBND FL080-100 1750Z
1. Station Identifier: KCRW

This is the station identifier of the nearest weather reporting location
to the reported conditions.
2. Report Type: UA
Reports will be routine (UA) or urgent (UUA).
3. Location: OV KBKW 360015-KCRW
OV indicates the report is in relation to a VOR. KBKW is the VOR
identifier, in this case Beckley VOR. 360015-KCRW indicates posi-
tion as related to the VOR. In this case, 15 miles out on the 360
degree radial. KCRW indicates this is a leg to the Charleston, West
Virginia VOR.
The next series of elements contain data that is read much like that in
METARs and TAFs. Each element starts with a 2-letter designator
which denotes the type of data with that element. The following defines
the element designators:
/TM: Time as Coordinated Universal Time
/FL: Altitude as Flight Level
/TP: Aircraft Type
/SK: Sky Cover (may include cloud height and coverage)

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-65

/WX: Weather Phenomenon (can include flight visibility, precipitation
and restrictions to visibility.
/TA: Outside air temperature at altitude in degrees Celsius.
/WV: Wind (direction in degrees magnetic north and speed in knots)
/TB: Turbulence (refer to the Airman’s Information Manual)
CAT - Clear Air Turbulence
CHOP - Choppy Turbulence
OCNL - Occasional
NEG - No Turbulence
ABV - Above
FIS Operation
BLO - Below
Section 2
LGT - Light - Momentarily causes slight, erratic changes in
altitude and/or attitude.
MOD - Moderate - Greater intensity changes in altitude and/or
attitude, but aircraft remains in positive control at all times.
Usually causes changes in indicated airspeed.
SEV - Severe - Causes large and abrupt changes to aircraft
altitude and/or attitude. Large variations in indicated airspeed
and momentary loss of control.
EXTRM - Extreme - Aircraft is violently tossed about and is
nearly impossible to control. May cause structural damage.
/IC: Icing (refer to the Airman’s Information Manual)
CLR - Clear
MX - Mixed (combination of rime and clear icing)
NEG - No Icing
ABV - Above
BLO - Below
Trace - Ice becomes perceptible. Rate of evaporation is
almost equal to the rate of accumulation. Deicing/anti-icing
equipment is not utilized unless encountered for a period of
time greater than 1 hour.
LGT - Light - Rate of accumulation may be a problem if flight
is prolonged for longer than 1 hour without deicing/anti-icing
equipment. Deicing/anti-icing removes and/or prevents accu-
mulation.
MOD - Moderate - The rate of accumulation is such that even
short encounters become potentially hazardous. Use of
deicing/anti-icing equipment or diversion is necessary.
SEV - Severe - Flight diversion is necessary. Deicing/anti-
icing equipment is not effective.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-66

/RM: Remarks (for reporting elements not included or to clarify pre-
viously reported items). Remarks can include anything. The
example translates to “moderate (MDT) mixed (MXD) icing during
climb (DURGC) from Roanoke, VA (KROA) northwestbound
(NWBND) between Flight Level 080 and 100 (FL080100) at
1750Z”.
UNDERSTANDING AIRMETS
The following is an example of a typical AIRMET with an explanation of
the elements.
FIS Operation
1 2 3 4
Section 2
CHIT WA 151900 AMD

5 AIRMET TANGO UPDT 2 FOR TURB
6 VALID UNTIL 160100
7 AIRMET TURB...KS MO
8 FROM MCI TO STL TO SGF TO ICT TO MCI
9 MOD TURB BLW 100 EXPCD
10 CONDS IPVG AFT 160000Z
1. Forecast Area: CHIT

This is the forecast area identifier of the issuing Weather Service
Forecast Office.
BOS Boston
CHI Chicago
DFW Dallas/Ft. Worth
MIA Miami
SFO San Francisco
SLC Salt Lake City
The T denotes the reason for the AIRMET. This could be one of the
following:
S Sierra IFR Ceilings < 1,000 feet and/or visibility
< 3 miles affecting > 50% of the area at
one time or extensive mountain obscu-
ration.
T Tango Turbulence Moderate turbulence, sustained suface
winds of ≥ 30 knots at the surface or
low level windshear.
Z Zulu Icing Moderate icing and/or freezing levels.
AIRMET items are considered widespread. Widespread is consid-
ered an area ≥ 3,000 square miles.
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-67

2. Report Type: WA
WA identifies an AIRMET.
3. Date and Time Issued: 151900
15 indicates the 15th day of the month. 1900 indicates UTC.
NOTE: AIRMETs may be issued up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the
validity period. The FIS system will display the data age as zero until the
start of the validity period.
4. AMD indicates an amended report. Reports can be amended due
to changing weather conditions or issuance/cancelation of a
FIS Operation
SIGMET. COR in this field would indicate a corrected AIRMET.
Section 2
RTD indicates a delayed AIRMET.
5. This line indicates that there is a second (2) update (UPDT) to this
AIRMET issued for turbulence (FOR TURB). More than one meteo-
rological condition may be addressed as shown in the following:
FOR IFR AND MTN (mountain) OBSCN (obscuration)
FOR ICE AND FRZLVL (freezing level)
FOR STG (strong) SFC (surface) WINDS AND LLWS (low level
wind shear)
6. This updated AIRMET is valid until 0100 UTC on the 16th day (16)
of the month. An AIRMET does not contain an explicit validity start
time.
7. This AIRMET forecasts turbulence (TURB) for the states of KS
(Kansas) and MO (Missouri). Geographic areas are also covered
such as CSTL WTRS (coastal waters). Other geographic abbrevia-
tions are used as well (see Appendix A).
8. The affected area is defined by lines FROM MCI (Kansas City) TO
STL (St. Louis) TO SGF (Springfield) TO ICT (Wichita) and back TO
MCI. Areas can be defined by lines between points which are air-
port or navaid identifiers.
9. Moderate (MOD) turbulence (TURB) below (BLW) 10,000 feet
expected (EXPCD).
10. Conditions (CONDS) improving (IPVG) after (AFT) the 16th day (16)
of the month 0000 UTC.
If conditions end more than one hour prior to the indicated expiration
time, an amended AIRMET will be issued stating it’s cancellation. If con-
ditions end within one hour of the indicated expiration time, the AIRMET
will be allowed to expire without cancellation. Once the report is can-
celled or expires, the FIS system no longer broadcasts the report.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-68

UNDERSTANDING SIGMETS
The following is an example of a typical SIGMET issued for turbulence
with an explanation of the elements.
1 2 3
CHIR UWS 041430

4 SIGMET ROMEO 1 VALID UNTIL 041830
5 KY TN WV VA OH
6 FROM CVG TO EKN TO PSK TO VXV TO CVG
FIS Operation
OCNL SEV TURB BTN 300 AND 360. RPRTD BY AIRCRAFT.

7
Section 2
CONDS CONTG BYD 1830Z.

8 SLM/GTB
1. Forecast Area: CHIR
This is the forecast area identifier of the issuing Weather Service
Forecast Office.
BOS Boston
CHI Chicago
DFW Dallas/Ft. Worth
MIA Miami
SFO San Francisco
SLC Salt Lake City
The R denotes report ROMEO. A new alphabetic designator is
given each time a SIGMET is issued for a new weather phenom-
enon. The order of issuance is as follows:
N NOVEMBER
O OSCAR
P PAPA
Q QUEBEC
R ROMEO
U UNIFORM
V VICTOR
W WHISKEY
X XRAY
Y YANKEE
SIGMETs are issued for:
Severe icing not associated with thunderstorms
Severe or extreme turbulence or clear air turbulence (CAT)
Dust storms or sandstorms lowering visibilities to < 3 miles
Volcanic ash
2. Report Type: UWS

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-69

UWS indicates this is the first issuance of report ROMEO.
Subsequent reports for ROMEO would display WS.
3. Date and Time Issued: 041430.
4. This line indicates that SIGMET ROMEO 1 is VALID UNTIL the 4th
day (04) of the month at 1830 UTC.
Each subsequent report issued for this same weather phenomenon
designated ROMEO would increment the number. For example,
ROMEO 2, ROMEO 3 and so on.
FIS Operation
5. Area of coverage by state or geographic area. In addition to state
Section 2
abbreviations, other area abbreviations may be seen here, such as,
TX CSTL WTRS (Texas Coastal Waters).
6. Location of weather phenomenon. Three letter designators for
navaids or airports are used to describe boundaries of coverage. If
the weather phenomenon extends across multiple forecast areas,
the location is described as if no boundaries exist.
7. Details of weather phenomenon. The example is typical of a syn-
opsis for turbulence:
OCNL (occasional) SEV (severe) TURB (turbulence) BTN
(between) 300 (30,000 feet) AND 360 (36,000 feet). RPRTD
(reported) BY AIRCRAFT. CONDS (conditions) CONTG (contin-
uing) BYD (beyond 1830Z.
More typical examples of descriptors used in other SIGMET weather
phenomenon are as follows:
MOD (moderate) TO
STG (strong) UDDFS (updrafts and downdrafts)
UPDFTS (updrafts)
DWNDFTS (downdrafts)
INVOF (in vicinity of) MTNS (mountains)
BLO (below) 360
BTWN (between) FRZLVL (freezing level) AND 360
ABV (above) 360
RPRTD (reported) BY ACFT (aircraft) IN VCNTY (vicinity)
RPRTD BY SVRL (several) ACFT
8. Issuers initials.
If conditions end more than one half hour prior to the indicated expiration
time, and the report does not state that conditions will continue, a cancel-
lation will be issued with CNCL SIGMET as the report designator. If con-
ditions are expected to continue, a new SIGMET will be issued. If condi-
tions end within one half hour of the indicated expiration time, the
SIGMET will be allowed to expire without cancellation. Once the report
is cancelled or expires, the FIS system no longer broadcasts the report.
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-70

UNDERSTANDING CONVECTIVE SIGMETS
The following is an example of a typical Convective SIGMET with an
explanation of the elements.
1 2 3
MKCC WST 221855

4 CONVECTIVE SIGMET 20C
5 VALID UNTIL 2055Z
6 ND SD
FIS Operation
7 FROM 60W MOT-GFK-ABR-90W MOT

Section 2
INTSFYG AREA SVR TSTMS MOVG FROM 2445. TOPS ABV FL450.
8 WIND GUSTS TO 60KT RPRTD. TORNADOES…HAIL TO 2 IN…WIND
GUSTS TO 65KT PSBL ND PTN.
1. Station Identifier: MKCC

MKC is the station identifier of the Aviation Weather Center (AWC)
in Kansas City.
The C denotes the report is for the Central portion of the continental
United States. The choices are as follows:
C Central
E East
W West
Convective SIGMETs are issued for:
Severe weather including: (a)Surface winds ≥ 50 knots,
(b) Surface hail ≥ 3/4 inch in diameter or (c) Tornadoes
Embedded thunderstorms (obscured by haze or other phenomena)
Line of thunderstorms
Thunderstorms ≥ VIP level 4 affecting ≥ 40% of an area ≥ 3000 sq.
mi.
2. Report Type: WST
WST indicates this is a convective SIGMET.
22 indicates the 22nd day of the month. 1855 indicates UTC.
4. This line is the identifying number of the Convective SIGMET.
Numbering begins daily at 0000 UTC. The C denotes the Central
portion of the country.

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-71

5. This line indicates that CONVECTIVE SIGMET 20C is VALID
UNTIL 2055Z time. Expiration time is two hours after issuance, but
Convective SIGMETs are issued hourly and replace the previous
hour’s product.
Each subsequent report issued for this same weather phenomenon
would increment the number. For example, 21C, 22C and so on.
6. Area of coverage by state ND (North Dakota) and SD (South
Dakota) or geographic area. In addition to state abbreviations, other
area abbreviations may be seen here, such as FL CSTL WTRS
(Florida Coastal Waters).
Location of weather phenomenon (may be an area, single cell or
FIS Operation
7.
Section 2
line). Three letter designators for navaids or airports are used to
describe boundaries of coverage.
The starting and ending point are identical for an area of thunder-
storms, like this: FROM 90W MOT-GFK-ABR-90W MOT (from 90
nm west of Minot, ND to Grand Forks, ND to Aberdeen, SD to 90 nm
west of Minot, ND).
A Single Cell thunderstorm 35 nm west of Kansas City would look
like this: 35WMKC
A Line of severe thunderstorms would look like this: FROM 90SE
SGF-70NE TXK-50NE LFK (from 90 nm southeast of Springfield,
MO to 70 nm northeast of Texarkana, AR to 50 nm northeast of
Lufkin, TX).
8. Details of weather phenomenon. Convective SIGMET details are
mostly in plain language with some abbreviations. This example is
typical for an area of severe thunderstorms:
INTSFYG (intensifying) AREA (of) SVR TSTMS (severe thunder-
storms) MOVG (moving) FROM 2445 (240 degrees at 45 knots).
Storm TOPS ABV (above) FL450 (flight level 4-5-0). WIND GUSTS
TO 60KT (knots) RPRTD (reported). TORNADOES…HAIL TO 2 IN
(inches in diameter)…WIND GUSTS TO 65 KT (knots) PSBL (pos-
sible) in the ND PTN (North Dakota portion).
For a single cell thunderstorm:
ISOLD (isolated) SVR TSTM (severe thunderstorm) D30 (30 nm in
diameter) MOVG (moving) FROM 2520 (250 degrees at 20 knots).
Storm TOPS ABV (above) FL450 (flight level 4-5-0). HAIL TO 2 IN
(inches in diameter) WIND GUSTS TO 65 KT (knots) PSBL (pos-
sible).
For a line of thunderstorms 25 nm wide:
LINE (line of) SVR TSTMS (severe thunderstorms) 25 MI WIDE
MOVG (moving) FROM 2745 (270 degrees at 45 knots). Storm

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-72

TOPS ABV (above) FL450 (flight level 4-5-0). WIND GUSTS TO
60KT (knots) RPRTD (reported). TORNADOES…HAIL TO 2 IN
(inches in diameter)…WIND GUSTS TO 65 KT (knots) PSBL (pos-
sible).
UNDERSTANDING ALERT WEATHER WATCHES (AWW)

The following is an example of a typical Alert Weather Watch with an
explanation of the elements.
1 2 3
5
FIS Operation
SPC AWW 162236

Section 2
4 WW 1162 SEVERE TSTM MS AL FL AND ADJ CSTL WTRS

6 162300Z - 170400Z
AXIS..75 STATUTE MILES NORTH AND SOUTH OF LINE..
7
45SW MOB/MOBILE AL/ - 30SSE DHN/DOTHAN AL/
8 ..AVIATION COORDS.. 65NM N/S /37SW MOB - 51WNW TLH/
HAIL SURFACE AND ALOFT..1 1/4 INCHES. WIND GUSTS..60
9
KNOTS. MAX TOPS TO 400. MEAN WIND VECTOR 23035.
1. Station Identifier: SPC

SPC is the station identifier for the Storm Prediction Center in
Norman, Oklahoma.
AWWs are issued for:
Tornado
Damaging winds or winds > 58 knots
Hail ≥ 3/4 inch in diameter.
2. Report Type: AWW
AWW indicates this is an Alert Weather Watch.
4. WW 1162 is the identifying number of the Alert Weather Watch.
Numbering begins yearly at 0000.
5. This line indicates the type of weather and the affected areas.
SEVERE TSTM (severe thunderstorm) for MS (Mississippi) AL
(Alabama) FL (Florida) AND ADJ CSTL WTRS (adjacent coastal
waters).
6. This line indicates that the watch is valid from 162300Z - 170400Z
(the 16th at 2300 Zulu to the 17th at 0400 Zulu).
KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-73

7. Coordinates of the watch box area. Draw a line 75 STATUTE
MILES NORTH AND SOUTH OF A LINE.. The endpoints of the line
are 45SSW MOB/MOBILE AL/-30SSE DHN/DOTHAN AL/ (45
miles south-southwest of Mobile, Alabama and 30 miles south-
southeast of Dothan, Alabama). Connect the lines to form the box.
Sometimes it might be defined as EAST AND WEST OF A LINE.. or
EITHER SIDE OF A LINE..
8. Aviation coordinates of the watch box area. Draw a line 65NM N/S /
(65 nautical miles north and south) of a line). The endpoints of the
line are 37SW MOB - 51WNW TLH/ (37 nautical miles southwest of
Mobile, Alabama and 51 nautical miles west-northwest of
Tallahassee, Florida). Connect the lines to form the box.
FIS Operation
Section 2
9. Details of the forecast weather. AWW details are mostly in plain lan-
guage with some abbreviations. This is an example of a typical
product.
HAIL SURFACE AND ALOFT..1 1/4 INCHES (hail diameter poten-
tial of one and one quarter inches) WIND GUSTS..60 KNOTS (wind
gust potential of 60 knots) MAX TOPS TO 400 (maximum tops of
the storms is 40,000 feet). MEAN WIND VECTOR 23035 (motion of
storm is 230 degrees at 35 knots).

KMD 250 FIS 4/29/04 1:36 PM Page 2-74
FIS Operation Understanding Weather Reports

Section 2

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-1
Introduction
SECTION 3
TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
The Traffic Function of the Bendix/King KMD 250 Multi Function Display
allows for the display and control of one of several models of traffic
avoidance systems. Some examples are TCAS I (Traffic Collision
Avoidance System), TCAS II, TAS (Traffic Avoidance System) and TIS
(Traffic Information Service).
This section describes the operation of the KMD 250 display for control-
ling the display of traffic. For detailed information on the proper use and
interpretation of the displayed traffic data when using TCAS I, TCAS II
and TAS systems, please reference the pilot’s guide that is provided
with the traffic avoidance system.
An active traffic avoidance system (TCAS I, TCAS II or TAS) is used for

detecting and tracking aircraft near your own aircraft. Aircraft detected,
tracked, and displayed are referred to as Intruders. Intruders are shown
Traffic Avoidance
as symbols on the traffic display. The system identifies the relative
threat of each Intruder by using various symbols and colors. The
Section 3
intruder’s altitude, relative to your own aircraft’s altitude, is annunciated if
the Intruder is reporting altitude. A trend arrow is used to indicate if the
Intruder is climbing or descending more than 500 feet per minute.
The passive Traffic Information Service (TIS) is a data link service that
provides information similar to VFR radar traffic advisories normally
received over voice radio. The data is received from the terminal Mode
S radar system through a TIS capable Mode S transponder to the KMD
display once per radar scan (approximately every 5 seconds).
TIS provides the relative position, relative altitude, altitude trend, and
estimated ground track angle for as many as 8 intruders that are within 7
NM horizontally and +3,500/-3000 feet vertically of the aircraft receiving
TIS. Only aircraft with operating transponders that are within the surveil-
lance volume of a TIS Mode S radar are visible to TIS. Terminal Mode
S radars equipped with TIS provide the service to 55 NM (or possibly
greater) of the radar location, and as low as the "line of site" limitation
inherent to radar surveillance.
ATC procedures and the “see and avoid concept” will continue to be the
primary means of ensuring aircraft separation. However, if communica-
tion is lost with ATC, TCAS/TAS/TIS adds a significant backup for colli-
sion avoidance.
Rev 2 Apr/2004 3-1 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-2
Introduction
The Bendix/King KMD 250 is shown below with the Traffic Page for
TAS/TCAS selected.
The Bendix/King KMD 250 is shown below with the Traffic Page for TIS
selected.
Traffic Avoidance
Section 3
TRAFFIC FUNCTION STATUS ICONS
The Traffic Function Status Icons are located in the lower left of the dis-
play. They are used to indicate whether or not the KMD 250 is currently
receiving and/or displaying traffic information. The following table shows
the various traffic icons and their meanings:

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-3
TAS/TCAS
TAS/TCAS
This section applies to TAS, TCAS I and TCAS II systems.
TAS/TCAS NORMAL OPERATION

To display the TCAS/TAS traffic page press the TRFC
function select key.
The following illustration defines the data that appears on the TAS/TCAS
Traffic Display Page:
4 5 6 7
3 8
Traffic Avoidance
10
Section 3
2
11
1
14 13 12
displayed.
3 Current Flight Level - FL ###
4 Altitude Volume - Current Altitude Volume selection is displayed in this field.
5 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is always
2 nm.
6 Active Flight Plan
7 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position.
8 Altitude Volume Softkey - When the ALTITUDE VOLUME softkey is pressed,
the display will step through NORMAL, ABOVE, BELOW and UNRESTRICTED.
9 Flight Level Softkey - Pressing FLIGHT LEVEL toggles the Flight Level
display on or off.
10 Traffic Intruder Symbols - Indicates type of traffic, altitude of traffic, vertical
trend of traffic and ground track of traffic.
11 Pop-Up Softkey - Pressing the MENU Key will display the pop-up softkey.
Pressing this softkey will toggle between DISABLE POP-UP and ENABLE
POP-UP. When enabled, the Traffic Page will be displayed whenever there
is a traffic alert.
12 System ON/SBY/TST - Rotary Knob selects system ON,SBY (standby) or
TST (test).
13 Page Display Name
14 System Operating Mode - If using a TAS system, TAS TST, TAS SBY, TA
ONLY or TAS FAIL will be displayed. If using a TCAS system, TCAS TST,
TCAS SBY, TA ONLY, TA/RA, or TCAS FAIL will be displayed.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-4
TAS/TCAS
OPERATIONAL CONTROLS FOR TAS/TCAS
ALTITUDE VOLUME - Toggles between
altitude volume views of NORMAL,
ABOVE, BELOW or UNRESTRICTED.
This key may be enabled or disabled in
system configuration.
FLIGHT LEVEL - Pressing the MENU Key will display the

FLIGHT LEVEL Softkey. Pressing this key toggles the alti-
tude tag between relative or absolute alti-
tude as shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
When absolute altitude is displayed, the
Flight Level will also be displayed in the
upper left of the screen. Operation in the
absolute mode is limited to 15 seconds.
This feature may be enabled or disabled in system configuration. See
note below.
NOTE: If FLIGHT LEVEL or ALTITUDE VOLUME Soft Keys or the

Rotary Knob are not active, these controls will be found on the separate
TAS/TCAS controller.
Traffic Avoidance
AUTO-POP-UP - Toggles between ENABLE POP-UP and

Section 3
DISABLE POP-UP. When enabled the Traffic Display will

automatically be displayed in a Traffic Alert
situation. In some situations, like high
traffic areas or flying in formation, this fre-
quent display changing could be a nui-
sance. Disabling the pop-up may desir-
able in these circumstances. This key may be enabled or disabled in
RNG▲/RNG▼ - Advances the indicator to the next range.

The upper button increases range, the lower button
decreases it. The selected range is displayed in the lower
left corner of the display with the inner range ring always 2
nm. The RNG button labels will not be displayed when
their respective range limits are reached.
Rotary Knob - Selects between Test

(TST), Standby (SBY) and On mode of
operation. This control may be enabled or
disabled in system configuration. If the
KMD 250TMis used with a TCAS II or L-3
Skywatch system, this control will not be
available.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-5
TAS/TCAS

Relative Altitude Mode Absolute Altitude Mode
TAS/TCAS SYMBOLOGY
NON-THREAT TRAFFIC
An open white diamond indicates that an intruder is not yet
considered a threat. For specifics on relative distance and
altitude that defines this symbol, please refer to the pilot’s
guide that is provided with the traffic avoidance system. This one is 200
feet above your own altitude, climbing at 500 feet per minute or greater.
Traffic Avoidance
Section 3
PROXIMITY INTRUDER TRAFFIC
A filled white diamond indicates that the intruding aircraft has
reached the next proximity threshold defined by the traffic
avoidance system, but is still not considered a threat. For
specifics on relative distance and altitude that defines this symbol,
please refer to the pilot’s guide that is provided with the traffic avoidance
system.This intruder is now 400 feet below your aircraft and climbing at
500 feet per minute or greater.
TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA)

A symbol change to a filled yellow circle indicates that the
intruding aircraft is considered to be potentially hazardous.
Depending on your own altitude the system will display a TA
when time to Closest Point of Approach (CPA) is reached as defined by
traffic avoidance system. For specifics on CPA as defined by the
system, please refer to the pilot’s guide that is provided with the traffic
avoidance system. Here the intruder is 100 feet above your aircraft,
descending at 500 feet per minute or greater.
RESOLUTION ADVISORY (RA)

This symbol will only be displayed when the KMD 250 is inter-
faced with a TCAS II system. A solid red square indicates
that the intruding aircraft is projected to be a collision threat.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-6
TAS/TCAS
TCAS II calculates that the intruder has reached a point where a
Resolution Advisory is necessary. The time to CPA with the intruder,
depending on your altitude, has been reached as defined by the traffic
avoidance system. For specifics on CPA as defined by the system,
please refer to the pilot’s guide that is provided with the traffic avoidance
system. The symbol appears together with an appropriate audio
warning and a vertical maneuver indication on the RA/VSI. This aircraft
is now 100 feet below your altitude and still descending at 500 feet per
minute or greater.
NOTE: An intruder must be reporting altitude in order to generate an RA.

Therefore, the RA symbol will always have an altitude tag.
“OFF-SCALE” TRAFFIC
TA or RA traffic that is beyond the selected range will be displayed as
half the appropriate symbol at the edge of the display matching the
bearing of the traffic.
“NO-BEARING”
TRAFFIC
Traffic Avoidance
If the bearing of TA or RA
traffic cannot be determined by
Section 3
the traffic avoidance system,

no traffic symbol will be dis-
played on the TRFC display.
The traffic information will
instead be displayed in the
lower center of the display as
shown in Figure 3-3. A max- Figure 3-3
imum of two “no-bearing” TA
and/or RA intruders can be displayed. If the intruder is not reporting alti-
tude, the altitude and trend arrow fields will be blank.
NOTE: “Off-Scale” and “No-

Bearing” advisories are dis-
played only on the TRFC
Page.
TA/RA WHILE IN MAP

OR WEATHER DISPLAY
If a Traffic Advisory presents
itself while in the Map or
Weather Display the traffic
function icon in the Functions
Legend will flash yellow along Figure 3-4
with ALERT as represented in Figure 3-4. In the case of a Resolution
Advisory in a TCAS II system, the icon will flash red.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-7
TAS/TCAS
AUTO-POP-UP
If AUTO-POP-UP is enabled, a
TA or RA will cause the Traffic
Display to be presented auto-
matically. The default range of
the pop-up display will be 7
nm.
To enable AUTO-POP-UP per-
form the following:
1. While viewing the Traffic
Figure 3-5
Display, press the MENU Key
to display the ENABLE POP-
UP Softkey as shown in Figure
3-5. This Softkey toggles
between ENABLE and DIS-
ABLE POP-UP.
VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A
DATA FIELD
Traffic Avoidance
Traffic may be selected for
Section 3
viewing in a Data Field as
shown in Figure 3-6 (also see Figure 3-6
Section 1 for displaying Data
Fields). Altitude tags and ver-
tical trend arrows will not be
shown with traffic symbol in the
Data Field display.
Traffic will not be available in
the Data Field if the Map
Orientation is set to North Up.
If the Map Display is in North
Up mode, the Traffic Data Field
will appear as shown in Figure
3-7.
Figure 3-7

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:45 PM Page 3-8
TAS/TCAS
TAS/TCAS SYSTEM FAULTS
NO DATA RECEIVED
If the KMD 250 is not receiving
any data from the TCAS or
TAS sensor then a screen sim-
ilar to Figure 3-8 will be dis-
played. This could indicate that
power is not being provided to
the traffic avoidance system
(e.g. a pulled breaker), a bad
wiring connection between the
display and the sensor, or a
failed TCAS or TAS unit. Figure 3-8
SYSTEM TEST
A system test can be performed to verify
the traffic avoidance system is working
properly. If the KMD 250 is configured to
Traffic Avoidance
use the Rotary Knob with the traffic func-

tion, turn the outer knob to
Section 3
select TST. Figure 3-9 indi-

cates a properly functioning
TCAS I/TAS system. An RA
will be displayed for a TCAS II
system. If the KMD 250 not
configured for use of the
Rotary Knob with the traffic
function, this test would be per-
formed using the appropriate
control unit.
If faults are detected in the Figure 3-9
KMD 250 or the traffic sensor
they will be displayed as
shown in Figure 3-10. This
figure shows all faults. Only
actual faults will be displayed.
Figure 3-10

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-9
Traffic Information Service
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)

This section applies only to TIS systems.
TIS is an alerting system that provides visibility to nearby traffic
enhancing “see and avoid” collision avoidance. It’s purpose is to
increase situational awareness by supplying information to assist in visu-
ally acquiring nearby aircraft. TIS does not relieve the pilot of “see and
avoid” responsibility. No avoidance maneuvers are provided or recom-
mended by TIS.
The service is offered through the Federal Aviation Administration’s
Mode S terminal sensors and uses the same surveillance information
provided to ATC. Estimated bearing, distance, altitude and heading
information for aircraft within 7 NM and +3,500/-3,000 feet altitude of
your aircraft is sent over the Mode S datalink to the TIS display. The
pilot is also alerted to aircraft that are predicted to be within 30 seconds
of a potential collision, no matter the distance or altitude.
Traffic Avoidance
Section 3
Mode S KMD 250 w/ TIS Display
Sensor
TIS
ALGORITHMS
KT 73 Mode S
Target aircraft are displayed only if operating a Mode A, C or S

transponder. TIS operation is transparent to ATC and requires no con-
troller intervention.
When the onboard TIS system makes a request for TIS, the request is
sent via the Mode S transponder through the datalink. The first available
Mode S sensor capable of supporting TIS for your aircraft responds by
sending data back through the datalink on every scan of the sensor
(approximately every 5 seconds). TIS will be provided by the sensor as
long as the aircraft is within coverage range of that sensor. When
entering the coverage range of another sensor, TIS will continue pro-
vided the next sensor is TIS capable. The transfer of service is auto-
matic. In addition to traffic data, the aircraft receives status messages
that advise the pilot when TIS service has been initiated, is continuing, or
has been terminated.
While coverage varies with terrain and local site parameters, “line-of-
sight” coverage is to be expected within 55 NM of a TIS capable Mode S
sensor. Terrain and obstacles can cause areas of no radar coverage.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-10

TIS LIMITATIONS
Traffic may not be displayed for one or more of the following reasons:
1. Radar site is out of service. If a TIS capable Mode S sensor is not in
service for any reason, TIS is not available. See Figure 3-11.
2. Your aircraft is beyond maximum range of a TIS capable Mode S
site. Maximum range can extend beyond 55 NM up to 100 NM.
However, expect TIS service to 55 NM. See Figure 3-11 and 3-12.
Traffic Avoidance
Section 3
Figure 3-11 - TIS Capable Mode S Radar Sensor Sites

Radar Coverage
Dead Zones
nm e
5 ng
~5 Ra
S
TI
s ge
rie an
Va r R
a
ad
R
Figure 3-12 - TIS Functional Range
3. Your aircraft is inside the “Cone of Silence. When near or above

(depending on altitude) the TIS radar site, and out of range of another
TIS radar site, TIS data cannot be received. See Figure 3-13.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-11

4. The other aircraft is within the “Cone of Silence”. So, remember,
there may be aircraft within your alert area, but if they are not seen by
the radar site they will not show on your display.
5. Your aircraft is below radar coverage. With no obstructions and flat
terrain, the coverage floor is about 2,000-3,000 feet at 60 miles and
4,000-6,000 feet at 100 miles. Terrain and obstacles can substantially
decrease coverage range or make coverage asymmetrical about the
radar site. See Figure 3-13.
“Cone of Silence”
Traffic Avoidance
Mode-S Terminal Secondary Surveillance Radar
Section 3
Radar Coverage
Dead Zones
Figure 3-13 - Obstructions To TIS Coverage
6. The other traffic is below radar coverage. The other aircraft may be
in situations mentioned in number 5 and therefore not seen by radar.
Again, there may be aircraft within your alert area, but if they are not
seen by the radar site they will not show on your display.
7. The other aircraft is without an operating a Mode A, C or S
transponder.
8. Bearing error increases as the distance from the radar site
increases. However, distance and relative altitude will remain accurate.
9. Due to the way the radar sites check for transponder faults, a reply
can be interpreted as two different aircraft. This causes a “self alert”.
This is shown as a “pop-up” alert intruder at or near the client’s position
and altitude lasting for only one or two radar scans. It most often occurs
during maneuvering or upon entry into TIS coverage.
NOTE: It is important to understand that no display or aural warning of
traffic information shows the location of all traffic in the vicinity.
Whenever in VMC conditions, continue to visually scan for traffic.
NOTE: Pilots should report TIS outages to Flight Service which will
report them to the Airway Facilities Operations Control Centers for reso-
lution, similar to a report of any other system outage.

TIS NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: TIS availability may be intermittent during turns or other maneu -
vering where the aircraft structure can block the line of sight between the
Mode S radar and the Mode S transponder antenna.
To display the TIS traffic page press the TRFC Function

Select Key.
The following illustration defines the data that appears on the TIS Traffic
Display Page:
5 6
7 8
4
3
9
10
2 11
12
1 13
15 14
2 Function Status Icons - Displays icons representing data available and displayed.
3 Range Rings - Outer ring radius is selected range, inner ring radius is always
2 nm.
4 Current Flight Level - FL:###
5 Audio Muting - When audio muting is turned on by pressing the ENABLE MUTE
Softkey, TIS Mute ON will be displayed in this field.
6 Heading - Current aircraft magnetic heading (HDG) or ground track (TRK). If no
heading or track information is available, the the field displays NO HDG/TRK.
7 Active Flight Plan
8 Traffic Intruder Symbols - Indicates type of traffic, altitude of traffic, vertical trend
of traffic and ground track of traffic.
9 Flight Level Softkey - Pressing FLIGHT LEVEL toggles the Flight Level display
on or off.
10 Aircraft Symbol - Indicates present position.
11 Audio Mute Softkey - Pressing the MENU Key will display the muting softkey.
Pressing this softkey will toggle between DISABLE MUTE and ENABLE MUTE.
12 Pop-Up Softkey - Pressing the MENU Key will display the pop-up softkey. Pressing
this softkey will toggle between DISABLE POP-UP and ENABLE POP-UP. When
enabled, the Traffic Page will be displayed whenever there is a traffic alert.
13 System ON/OFF - Rotary Knob selects TIS ON or OFF.
14 Page Display Name
15 TIS Operating Mode - Displays TIS ON, TIS OFF or TIS FAIL.
Rev 3 Aug/2005 3-12 KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-13

TIS OPERATIONAL CONTROLS
FLIGHT LEVEL - Pressing the MENU Key will display the
FLIGHT LEVEL Softkey. Pressing this key toggles the alti-
tude tag between relative or absolute alti-
tude as shown in Figures 3-14 and 3-15.
When absolute altitude is displayed, the
Flight Level will also be displayed in the
upper left of the screen. Operation in the
absolute mode is limited to 15 seconds.
AUDIO MUTE - The “TIS Unavailable” audio notification
may be muted by pressing the ENABLE MUTE Softkey.
When enabled TIS Mute ON will be dis-
played in the upper left of the screen. The
DISABLE MUTE Softkey will then be
available to disable the audio muting. The
audio traffic alerts are not affected.
AUTO-POP-UP - Toggles between ENABLE POP-UP and

DISABLE POP-UP. When enabled the Traffic Display will
automatically be displayed in a Traffic Alert
situation. In some situations, like high
traffic areas or flying in formation, this fre-
Traffic Avoidance
quent display changing could be a nui-
Section 3
sance. Disabling the pop-up may desir-
able in these circumstances. This key may be enabled or disabled in
RNG▲/RNG▼ - Advances the indicator to the next range.
The upper button increases range, the lower button
decreases it. The selected range is displayed in the lower
left corner of the display with the inner range ring always 2
nm. The RNG button labels will not be displayed when
their respective range limits are reached.
Rotary Knob - Turns the TIS system On or
OFF.

Relative Altitude Mode Absolute Altitude Mode

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-14

TIS SYMBOLOGY
TIS symbols have a track pointer which are not on TCAS/TAS symbols.
The track pointer shows the estimated ground track direction the traffic is
moving (in 45° increments) relative to your own aircraft.
PROXIMITY INTRUDER TRAFFIC
A filled white diamond indicates that the intruding aircraft has
reached the proximity traffic threshold as defined by the TIS
system, but is still not considered a threat. This intruder is
now 100 feet below your aircraft and flying level. The track
pointer on the diamond indicates the direction of the intruder’s ground
track. Here the intruder is moving approximately 45° to your current
track or heading.
PROXIMITY INTRUDER NON-ALTITUDE REPORTING

(NAR)TRAFFIC
An open white diamond indicates proximity traffic that is non-
altitude reporting. The symbol indicates that the intruder’s
ground track is approximately 90° to your current track or
Traffic Avoidance
heading.
Section 3
TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA)

A symbol change to a filled yellow circle indicates that the
intruding aircraft is considered to be potentially hazardous.
Depending on your own altitude the system will display a TA
when time to Closest Point of Approach (CPA) is reached as
defined by the TIS system. Here the intruder is 100 feet above your air-
craft. The arrow indicates the intruder is descending at 500 feet per
minute or greater. The intruder is moving at approximately 180° to your
current track or heading
TRAFFIC ADVISORY NON-ALTITUDE REPORTING (NAR)

An open yellow circle indicates that the intruding aircraft is
considered to be potentially hazardous and is not reporting
altitude. Here the intruder is moving at approximately 225° to
your current track or heading.
“OFF-SCALE” TRAFFIC
TA traffic that is beyond the selected range will be displayed as half the
appropriate symbol at the edge of the display matching the bearing of
the traffic.

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-15

TRAFFIC ADVISORY
WHILE IN MAP DISPLAY
If a Traffic Advisory presents
itself while in the Map or
Weather Display the traffic
function icon in the Functions
Legend will flash yellow along
with ALERT as represented in
Figure 3-16.
AUTO-POP-UP Figure 3-16

If AUTO-POP-UP is enabled, a
TA will cause the Traffic
Display to be presented auto-
matically. The default range of
the pop-up display will be 7 nm.
To enable AUTO-POP-UP per-
form the following:
Traffic Avoidance
1. While viewing the Traffic
Display, press the MENU Key
Section 3
to display the ENABLE POP-
UP Softkey as shown in Figure
3-17. This Softkey toggles Figure 3-17
between ENABLE and DIS-
ABLE POP-UP.
VIEWING TRAFFIC IN A
DATA FIELD
Traffic may be selected for
viewing in a Data Field as
shown in Figure 3-18 (also see
Section 1 for displaying Data
Fields). Altitude tags, vertical
trend arrows and ground track
pointers will not be shown with
traffic symbol in the Data Field

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-16

Traffic will not be available in
the Data Field if the Map
Orientation is set to North Up.
It the Map Display is in North
Up mode, the Traffic Data Field
will appear as shown in Figure
3-19.
COAST MODE
When intruders are displayed
and TIS information is not Figure 3-19
received from the terminal
Mode S radar for one radar
scan, the altitude tag of the
intruder is replaced with the
text CST to inform the pilot that
the system is in Coast mode.
See Figure 3-20. CST will also
be displayed in the Traffic Data
Window. This means the dis-
Traffic Avoidance
played intruder information is

Section 3
old and could have changed

since the last update.
Figure 3-20
When two radar scans have
elapsed without TIS informa-
tion, the intruders are removed
from the display and TIS
UNAVAILABLE is displayed in
the center of the Traffic Display
(Figure 3-21) or UNAVAIL will
be displayed in the Traffic Data
Window. Also, an audible "TIS
UNAVAILABLE" notification will
be heard (if not muted). The
display will revert to normal
when TIS information is again
available. Figure 3-21

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-17

TIS SYSTEM FAULTS
SYSTEM OFF
If the TIS system is set to the
OFF position, Figure 3-22 will
be displayed.
Figure 3-22
NO DATA RECEIVED
If the KMD 250 is not receiving
data from the TIS receiver then
This could indicate that power
Traffic Avoidance
is not being provided to the TIS
receiver (e.g. a pulled breaker),
Section 3
the TIS receiver is turned off, a
bad wiring connection between
the display and the receiver, or
a failed TIS receiver.
Figure 3-23
TRANSPONDER NOT
REPORTING ALTITUDE
If the transponder’s altitude
source has failed or the
transponder is put into a non-
altitude reporting mode, Figure
3-24 will be displayed.
Figure 3-24

KMD 250 TRFC 4/29/04 1:46 PM Page 3-18
Traffic Avoidance Traffic Information Service

Section 3

Stormscope PG 4/29/04 1:44 PM Page 4-1
Stormscope® Operation
SECTION 4
WX-500 STORMSCOPE® OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
The Bendix/King KMD 250 is capable of being interfaced to an L-3 WX-
500 Stormscope® Series II Weather Mapping Sensor. The WX-500
detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms within a 200
nm radius of the aircraft. The information is then sent to the KMD 250
and will display the location of the electrical discharges both on the map
displays and on a dedicated Stormscope® display.
For a detailed description of the WX-500 and how to interpret the light-
ning display and a list of error codes, please reference the WX-500
Stormscope® User’s Guide.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The antenna detects the electric and magnetic fields generated by intra-
cloud, inter-cloud, or cloud-to-ground electrical discharges that occur
within a 200 nm radius of the aircraft and sends the resulting "discharge
signals" to the processor. The processor digitizes, analyzes, and con-
verts the discharge signals into range and bearing data then stores the
data in memory. The WX-500 processor then communicates this infor-
mation to the KMD 250 as 'strikes' and 'cells'. The WX-500 updates the
KMD 250 every two seconds.
STORMSCOPE® FUNCTION STATUS ICONS

Stormscope®
Section 4
The Stormscope® Function Status Icons are located in the lower left of
the display. They are used to indicate whether or not the KMD 250 is
currently receiving and/or displaying Stormscope® information. The fol-
lowing table shows the various Stormscope® icons and their meanings:

OPERATION
As mentioned earlier, the WX-500 is controlled through the KMD 250.

The focus on this section is to provide both background information and
a more detailed explanation of the operating procedures. The following
text assumes you have both the WX-500 and the KMD 250 switched on
and that you have selected the Stormscope® display using the WX
Function Select Key on the KMD 250.
POWER-UP
At power-up, the WX-500 executes a power-up self test. The self test
takes approximately 25 seconds to ensure that all major WX-500 func-
tions are operating properly. During this period you may receive a NO
DATA RECEIVED FROM STORMSCOPE notification, this is normal.
Functions tested include antenna reception, memory and microprocessor
functions. An error message is displayed if a fault is detected.
HEADING STABILIZATION
Some aircraft are equipped with a remote heading reference, such as an

HSI with a slaved directional gyro. This allows the heading stabilization
feature to automatically adjust the position of the discharge points on the
display when the aircraft changes heading. The heading information
comes from a remote heading source installed in the aircraft that has
been connected to the WX-500. If this heading information is valid, the
WX-500 and KMD 250 will use it. In the absence of an external heading
reference, such as an aircraft with only a directional gyro, or the failure of
the heading reference, the KMD 250 will not allow stormscope strikes to
be overlaid on the Map Display. When no heading is available it is the
Stormscope®
responsibility of the user to manually clear strikes after executing a

Section 4
change in heading for reasons discussed in the next section.
CLEAR ALL DISCHARGE POINTS
Clearing the discharge points periodically while monitoring

thunderstorms is a good way to determine if the storm is
building or dissipating. Discharge points in a building storm will reappear
faster and in larger numbers. Discharge points in a dissipating storm will
appear slower and in smaller numbers. To clear the discharge points,
press the MENU Key then press the CLEAR STRIKES Softkey.
Clearing the display is especially important if an external heading refer-
ence is not used with the system or has failed. The display should be
cleared after changes in heading in order to make the displayed strikes
reflect their true position in relation to the aircraft.

SWITCH BETWEEN WEATHER VIEWS
When the Stormscope® display is selected the KMD 250 can display
strikes in one of two views, either all round (360°) or forward looking only
(120°). To switch the display turn the Rotary Knob to toggle between the
displays. Figure 4-1 is an example of the all round view and Figure 4-2
shows the forward looking view.
SWITCH BETWEEN DISPLAY MODES

The KMD 250 can display the
Stormscope® data in one of
two modes, either Cell Mode or
Strike Mode. To switch the
display between modes press
the MENU Key to display
CHANGE MODE Softkey to
toggle between CELL MODE
and STRIKE MODE as shown
Stormscope®
Section 4
in Figure 4-4. The mode
selected here will remain in
effect until you change it, unless Figure 4-3
the unit is turned off and back
on.
Cell Display Mode
When viewing the

Stormscope® display, if cell
display mode is selected, the
KMD 250 plots a "+" symbol
(discharge point) on the display
when it detects associated dis-
charges within the selected
Figure 4-4

range and view (see Figure 4-3). The KMD 250 will plot another "+"
close to the first for each additional discharge determined to be associ-
ated with the group. The KMD 250 will not plot a "+" for any discharge
not associated with a group unless it's detected within a 25 nm radius of
the aircraft. The effect of this clustering algorithm is to display the loca-
tion of storm cells instead of individual discharges. The cell display mode
is most useful during periods of heavy electrical discharge activity. Using
the cell display mode during these periods frees the pilot from sifting
through a display full of discharge points to determine exactly where the
storm cells are located.
If discharges are detected within 25 nm of the aircraft, the
stormscope icon in the Functions Legend will be displayed as
that shown here.
Strike Display Mode
If the strike display mode is selected, the KMD 250 immediately plots an
"x" symbol (discharge point) on the display for each individual discharge
it detects within the selected range and view. The strike display mode
plots discharge points on the display in relation to where the discharges
are actually detected instead of plotting them close to an associated
group of discharge points as is done in the cell display mode. The strike
display mode is most useful during periods of light electrical activity
because it may plot discharges associated with a building thunderstorm
sooner than the cell display mode would.
Again, if discharges are detected within 25 nm of the aircraft, the storm-
scope icon in the Functions Legend will be displayed as that shown pre-
viously.
Stormscope®
CHANGING DISPLAY RANGE

Section 4
To change the displayed range of the Stormscope® dis-

play, press the RNG ∆ or RNG ∇ keys. With each press of
the keys, the display changes to display the electrical dis-
charge activity detected within the new range. The range
indicator will also change to display the numerical value of
the new range (25, 50, 100, or 200 nm). This new range
corresponds to the distance from the aircraft to the outer
range ring on the display.
The KMD 250 stores electrical discharge information for all ranges simul-
taneously to provide an instant, up-to-date display of electrical discharge
activity when a new range is selected.

When moving from one range to the next, the 25 nm range is always
indicated by the solid inner ring to advise of close proximity to thunder-
storms. Also, notice that the discharge points are progressively larger on
the shorter ranges and smaller on the longer ranges. This effect makes it
easier to spot clusters of discharge points in any range.
OPERATION IN STORMSCOPE® MODE WITH FLIGHT PLAN
If the KMD 250 is receiving Flight Plan information from the GPS and a
valid heading input is available, the Flight Plan lines and waypoints will
be displayed on the Stormscope® displays.
NOTE: In order to align the lightning strikes correctly to the flight plan
lines, heading information is necessary.
OPERATION IN MAP DISPLAY
The majority of the text in this section refers to the Stormscope® displays
on the KMD 250. It is also possible however to see thunderstorm cell or
strike data while in the Map Display. The Stormscope® overlay must be
enabled on Map Setup Page 6.
NOTE: Lightning data will only be displayed on the map if a heading ref-
erence is available in the form of an external heading reference input
(described previously).
Any settings made while in the Stormscope® displays (i.e.
cell/strike mode, clear etc) will be carried over into the Map dis-
play. Lightning icons are shown here as they appear on the
Map display. The range at which lightning icons are displayed
is selectable on Map Setup Page 6.
Stormscope®
Section 4
CAUTION
Because the accuracy of the stormscope sensor is limited, do not
rely on the placement of lightning icons for map range settings less
than 25 nm.


Stormscope®
Section 4

Messages 4/29/04 1:43 PM Page 5-1
System Messages
SECTION 5
SYSTEM MESSAGES
VIEWING SYSTEM
MESSAGES
A system message is pre-
sented as MESSAGE PRESS
MENU in bold yellow text that
flashes alternating with the
page title at the bottom of the
screen as shown in Figure 5-1.
When the MENU Key is
Figure 5-1
pressed, the message will be
displayed as in Figure 5-2. In
this case the message is a FIS
Receiver Failure.
Pressing the OK Softkey will
exit the Message Page and the
yellow MESSAGE PRESS
MENU prompt will no longer
be displayed.
To access the system mes-
sage again, perform the fol-
lowing steps: Figure 5-2
display the AUX MENU
Softkey as in Figure 5-3.
System Messages
Section 5
Figure 5-3

System Messages
Softkey to display the AUX-
MAIN MENU Page as shown
in Figure 5-4.
Messages as shown in Figure
5-4.
4. Press the SELECT
Softkey to display to display
the AUX-MESSAGES Page as
shown in Figure 5-5. Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
System Messages
Section 5

System Messages
The following table describes the possible system messages:
Message Text Description

All User Settings Cleared To This message indicates that a problem was detected in the internal
Defaults memory storage for user preference settings. All settings have been
reset to their factory defaults.
Data Card Has Expired The data card contains information required for receiving FIS information.
Unable To Receive FIS Data The data card has expired and FIS information will no longer be avail-
able. Go to www.bendixking.com and order a data card update.
Data Card Update Required The data card contains information required for receiving FIS information.
For Continued Reception Of If the data card is not updated soon, then FIS information will no longer
FIS Data be available. Go to www.bendixking.com and order a data card update.
Duplicate User Waypoint In This message occurs if more than one user waypoint have the same
Flight Plan Data identifier. This usually means that the flight plan and user data file on
the datacard have been modified incorrectly. Check the flight plans to
make sure the waypoints in them are correct. Edit if necessary.
Error In Flight Plan File An error has occurred while reading the flight plan data from the data-
card. This usually means the flight plan file on the datacard has been
modified incorrectly. Check the flight plans to make sure the waypoints
in them are correct. Edit if necessary. It message persists after
repeated power cycles, replace the datacard.
Error Writing Flight Plan An error has occurred when the flight plan data was being stored on the
Data To Datacard datacard. This may indicate a faulty datacard. If the error persists,
replace the datacard.
FIS Data Not Received For The KMD 250 has previously received FIS data, but it has been over 15
More Than 15 Minutes minutes since the last reception. This is most likely due to the aircraft
being at an altitude or location outside of FIS network coverage. See the
FIS Network Status Page for locations of FIS transmitters and status.
FIS Decryption Processor The KMD 250 is unable to decrypt the FIS data due to FIS Decryption
Error. FIS Data May Be Processor Error.
Unavailable
FIS Receiver Failure The KMD 250 is unable to communicate with the KDR 510 FIS VHF
Digital Radio. If this message persists, it may indicate a problem with the
KDR 510 or a wiring problem between the KDR 510 and KMD 250.
FIS Subscription Database This message occurs when an error is detected in the FIS Subscription
Error. Update Data Card To Data on the datacard. This usually means that the datacard is out of
Receive FIS Data date and needs to be updated in order to receive FIS data.
FIS Subscription Will Expire This message occurs when at least one FIS subscription is about to
Soon expire. Check the subscription status on the Aux FIS Subscription page.
Go to www.bendixking.com to purchase a new subscription.
Flight Plan Waypoint(s) Not This message will be displayed if an invalid waypoint is found in a flight
Found In Database Have plan. This usually means the flight plan file on the datacard has been
Been Deleted modified incorrectly. Check the flight plans to make sure the waypoints
in them are correct. Edit if necessary.
Inside SUA This message is displayed when the aircraft is within Special Use
Airspace. Alerting must be enabled on Navigation Setup Page.
Internal GPS Failure This message is displayed if the internal GPS receiver (if so equipped)
has failed. Turn the KMD 250 off and then back on. If the message
persists, the unit may need service.
Internal Temperature Has This message appears when the KMD 250 unit temperature is too high.
Exceeded Limits. Turn Unit Turn the unit off to allow it to cool down. This may indicate that the air-
System Messages
Off flow around the KMD 250 has been blocked.

Invalid User Waypoint In Indicates that an invalid user waypoint is found in a flight plan. This
Section 5
Flight Plan Data usually means the flight plan file on the datacard has been modified
incorrectly. Check flight plans to make sure the waypoints in them are
correct. Edit if necessary. If the error persists, replace the datacard.

System Messages
Message Text Description

Nav Data Referenced To This message is displayed when a user-defined magnetic variation of 0
True North degrees is being used for navigation data. Check Navigation Setup
Page.
Nav Data Referenced To This message is displayed when a user-defined magnetic variation is
User-Defined Mag Var being used for navigation data. Check Navigation Setup Page.
No Valid FIS Subscriptions This message occurs when no current FIS subscriptions are available.
FIS data will be unavailable. Check the subscription status on the Aux
Menu FIS Subscription page. Go to www.bendixking.com to purchase a
new subscription.
Regulated 12V Out Of The internal 12V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.
Range. Switch Unit Off Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may
need service.
Regulated 5V Out Of Range. The internal 5V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.
Switch Unit Off Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may
need service.
Regulated 3.3V Out Of The internal 3.3V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.
Range. Switch Unit Off Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may
need service.
Regulated 3V Out Of Range. The internal 3V power supply is operating outside its acceptable range.
Switch Unit Off Turn the unit off and back on. If the message persists then the unit may
need service.
Stormscope Failure The KMD 250 is unable to communicate with the Stormscope® or it has
reported a failure. See the Stormscope® page for error codes and the
Stormscope® users manual for more information.
Traffic System Failure The KMD 250 is unable to communicate with the traffic system or the
traffic system has reported a failure.
Unit Configuration Cleared A problem was detected in the memory used for storing the unit configu-
To Defaults ration settings. The settings have been set back to factory defaults. In
most cases the unit will need to be reconfigured by an authorized
Bendix/King installer in order to operate properly.
Unit History Data Cleared To A problem was detected in the memory used to store unit history informa-
Defaults tion. The memory has effect on operation, it simply means less informa-
tion will be available to the service center if the unit requires service.
System Messages
Section 5

Appendix A 4/29/04 1:20 PM Page A-1
Definitions, Acronyms & Abbreviations

APPENDIX A
Definitions, Abbreviations
DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Appendix A
DEFINITIONS
Alphabetic: any of the following characters (b/ is a space): b/ABCDE-

FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Alphanumeric: any of the following characters (b/ is a space):
b/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
Automatic Leg Sequencing: As a waypoint is reached in the flight
plan, the next leg and waypoint of the flight plan automatically becomes
active.
Baud: bits per sec
Barometric Altitude: pressure altitude corrected for barometric
altimeter setting
Bearing To User Waypoint (BRG): bearing from the present position to
the active user waypoint measured clockwise relative to true or magnetic
north (true is implied unless magnetic is specified)
Cross Track Error: distance from the present position to the nearest
point on the desired course, and the direction (right or left) from the
desired course to the present position
Cursor Field: a character position or group of adjacent character posi-
tions on which a cursor can appear
Data Field: a character position or group of adjacent character positions
which display a single data item; a data field may be a single character
cursor field, or may contain multiple characters.
Data List: an ordered list of data elements which a given cursor field
can accept
Desired Track (DTK): The angle that the desired flight path makes with
respect to true north at the point nearest the present position. Magnetic
desired track uses the local magnetic variation.
Distance To Waypoint (DIS): distance from the present position to the
active waypoint
Ground Speed: absolute value of the rate of change of position
Headwind: difference between true airspeed and ground speed when
true airspeed is more than ground speed
Knots: Nautical Miles/hr
Rev 2 Apr/2004 A-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide


Leg Mode: navigation of a route by picking the most direct route
between waypoints along the route.
Basic Operation
OBS Course Mode: selecting a course to a waypoint based on setting

Appendix A
a specific bearing “to” or “from” the waypoint.

Special Use Airspace (SUA): any of the following: prohibited area,
restricted area, warning area, alert area, MOA, Class A through G,
unknown, danger, caution, training, CTA, or TMA type.
Tailwind: difference between ground speed and true airspeed when
ground speed is more than true airspeed.
Track (TRK): angle of the aircraft’s path over the ground measured
clockwise relative to north.
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AAS: Aeronautical Advisory Service

ACT: Active (user waypoint or flight plan)
ADF: Automatic Direction Finder
AFIS: Aerodrome Flight Information Service
AGL: Above Ground Level
ALT: Altitude
AMR: Americas data area
ANSI: American National Standards Institute
APR: Approach
APT: Airport
ARTCC: Air Route Traffic Control Center
ARVL: Arrival
ASOS: Automated Surface Observation System
ATC: Air Traffic Control
ATF: Aerodrome Traffic Frequency
ATI: Atlantic International data area
ATIS: Automatic Terminal Information Service
AWOS: Automated Weather Observing System
A/C: Aircraft
BRG: Bearing


CAA: Civil Aviation Authority
CAS: Calibrated Airspeed
Appendix A
CL B: Class B Airspace
CL C: Class C Airspace
CLR: Clearance Delivery
com: communication
CDI: Course Deviation Indicator
CTA: Control Area
CTAF: Common Traffic Advisory Frequency
CTR: Control Zone or Center
dB: decibels
DEP: Departure
DIR: Director (approach control/radar)
DIS: Distance
Dgr: Danger
DME: Distance Measuring Equipment
DOT: United States Department of Transportation
DTK: Desired Track
EFIS: Electronic Flight Instrument System
ESA: Enroute Safe Altitude
ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE: Estimated Time Enroute
FAA: Federal Aviation Administration
FAR: Federal Aviation Regulations
FIR: Flight Information Region
FIS: Flight Information Services
FLT: Flight
FPL: Flight Plan
FPM: Feet Per Minute
FSS: Flight Service Station
FT: Feet


GCO: Ground Communications Outlet
GPS: Global Positioning System
Basic Operation
Appendix A
GND: Ground
GRND: Ground
hr: hour
HSI: Horizontal Situation Indicator
IFR: Instrument Flight Rules
IGS: Instrument Guidance System (used outside U.S. only)
ILS: Instrument Landing System
in.: inches
INT: Intersection
Kt.: Knots
LAT: Latitude
LB: Pounds
LBC: Localizer Back Course
LDA: Localizer Type Directional Aid Approach
LOC: Localizer Approach
LON: Longitude
m: meters
MATZ: Military Air Traffic Zone (used outside the U.S. only)
mB: millibars
MCOM: Multicom
MF: Mandatory Frequency
mi: statute miles
min: minutes
MLS: Microwave Landing System
MOA: Military Operation Area
MSA: Minimum Safe Altitude
MSL: Mean Sea Level
msec: milliseconds
NDB: Non-Directional Beacon


NM: Nautical Miles
NO APR: No Approach
Appendix A
NPA: Non-Precision Approach
NP APR: Non-Precision Approach
NVM: Non Volatile Memory
OBI: Omni-directional Bearing Indicator
OBS: Omni-directional Bearing Selector
Obs: Obstacle
OSGB: Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
PAI: Pacific International data area
PETE: Pointer ETE
Phb: Prohibited (Airspace)
PPOS: Present Position
PTAX: Pre-Taxi Clearance
RAD: Radial
RDO: Radio
RDR: Radar-Only Frequency
REF: Reference
Res: Restricted (Airspace)
RMI: Radio Magnetic Indicator
SDF: Simplified Directional Facility Approach
sec: seconds
SPD: Speed
SUA: Special Use Airspace
TKE: Track Angle Error
TMA: Terminal Area
TOPO: Topographical Data (i.e. coastlines, terrain, rivers,
lakes etc)
TRFC: Traffic
TRK: Actual Track
TRSA: Terminal Radar Service Area
TWR: Tower


UIR: Upper Information Region
UNIC: Unicom
Basic Operation
Appendix A
UNS: Unspecified
UTC: Universal Coordinated Time (same as Greenwich
Mean Time)
UTM: Universal Transverse Mercator
V: Volts
VDL: VHF Data Link
VHF: Very High Frequency
VOR: Very High Frequency Omni-directional Radio
Range
VRP: Visual Reference Point
WPT: Waypoint
XTK: Cross Track Error
°C: degrees Celsius
°F: degrees Fahrenheit

Appendix B 4/29/04 1:21 PM Page B-1
Common Weather Abbreviations

APPENDIX B
COMMON WEATHER ABBREVIATIONS
ABNDT Abundant AFCTG Affecting
ABNML Abnormal AFDK After dark
ABT About AFOS Automated Field
ABV Above Operations System
AC Convective outlook AFSS Automated Flight
or altocumulus Service Station
ACC Altocumulus castel- AFT After
lanus clouds AFTN Afternoon
Wx Abbreviations
ACCAS Altocumulus castel- AGL Above ground level
Appendix B
lanus clouds AGN Again
ACFT MSHP Aircraft Mishap AGRD Agreed
ACCUM Accumulate AGRS Agrees
ACFT Aircraft AGRMT Agreement
ACLT Accelerate AHD Ahead
ACLTD Accelerated AIRMET Airman’s Meteoro-
ACLTG Accelerating logical Information
ACLTS Accelerates AK Alaska
ACPY Accompany AL Alabama
ACRS Across ALF Aloft
ACSL Altocumulus ALG Along
standing lenticular ALGHNY Allegheny
ACTV Active ALP Airport Location
ACTVTY Activity Point
ACYC Anticyclone ALQDS All quadrants
ADJ Adjacent ALSTG Altimeter setting
ADL Additional ALT Altitude
ADQT Adequate ALTA Alberta
ADQTLY Adequately ALTHO Although
ADRNDCK Adirondack ALTM Altimeter
ADVCT Advect ALUTN Aleutian
ADVCTD Advected AMD Amend
ADVCTG Advecting AMDD Amended
ADVCTN Advection AMDG Amending
ADVCTS Advects AMDT Amendment
ADVN Advance AMP Amplify
ADVNG Advancing AMPG Amplifying
ADVY Advisory AMPLTD Amplitude
ADVYS Advisories AMS Air mass
AFCT Affect AMT Amount
AFCTD Affected ANLYS Analysis
Rev 2 Apr/2004 B-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide


ANS Answer AWIPS Advanced Interactive
AO1 Automated Weather Processing
Reporting Station System
AO2 Automated AWOS Automated Weather
Reporting Station Observing system
AOA At or above AWT Awaiting
AOB At or below AWW Alert Weather Watch
AP Anomalous AZ Arizona
Propagation AZM Azimuth
APCH Approach B Began
APCHG Approaching BACLIN Baroclinic
Wx Abbreviations
APCHS Approaches BAJA Baja, California

Appendix B
APLCN Appalachian BATROP Barotropic

APLCNS Appalachians BC British Columbia or
APPR Appear patches (descriptor
used with FG)
APPRG Appearing
BCFG Patchy fog
APPRS Appears
BCH Beach
APRNT Apparent
BCKG Backing
APRNTLY Apparently
BCM Become
APRX Approximate
BCMG Becoming
APRXLY Approximately
BCMS Becomes
AR Arkansas
BD Blowing dust
ARL Air Resources Lab
BDA Bermuda
ARND Around
BDRY Boundary
ARPT Airport
BECMG Becoming
ASAP As soon as possible
BFDK Before dark
ASL Above Sea Level
BFR Before
ASMD As Amended
BGN Begin
ASOS Automated Surface
Observing System BGNG Beginning
ASSOCD Associated BGNS Begins
ASSOCN Association BHND Behind
ATCT Air Traffic Control BINOVC Breaks in overcast
Tower BKN Broken
ATLC Atlantic BL Blowing
ATTM At this time BLD Build
ATTN Attention BLDG Building
AUTO Automated report BLDS Builds
AVBL Available BLDUP Buildup
AVG Average BLKHLS Black Hills
AVN Aviation model BLKT Blanket
AWC Aviation Weather BLKTG Blanketing
Center


BLKTS Blankets CAT Clear air turbulence
BLO Below or below CAVOK Ceiling and visibility
clouds OK
BLW Below CAVU Ceiling and visibility
BLZD Blizzard unlimited
BN Blowing sand CB Cumulonimbus
BND Bound CBMAM Cumulonimbus
Mammatus clouds
BNDRY Boundary
CC Cirrocumulus
BNDRYS Boundaries
CCCC Generic WMO format
BNTH Beneath code group for a
Wx Abbreviations
BOOTHEEL Bootheel four-letter location
identifier
Appendix B
BR Branch or mist
(METAR, used only CCL Convective conden-
for visibility between sation level
5/8 and 6 miles) CCLDS Clear of clouds
BRF Brief CCLKWS Counterclockwise
BRG Branching CCSL Cirrocumulus
BRK Break standing lenticular
BRKG Breaking CCx Code used in the
WMO abbreviated
BRKHIC Breaks in higher heading to indicate
clouds a corrected forecast,
BRKS Breaks where x is the letter
BRKSHR Berkshire A through X
BRKSHRS Berkshires CDFNT Cold front
BRM Barometer CDFNTL Cold frontal
BRN Bulk Richardson CFP Cold front passage
Number CG Cloud to ground
BRS Branches (lightning)
BS Blowing snow CHC Chance
BTWN Between CHCS Chances
BWER Bounded weak CHG Change
echo region CHGD Changed
BYD Beyond CHGG Changing
C Celsius CHGS Changes
CA California or cloud- CHI Cloud-Height
to-air lightning in indicator
PIREPs CHINO Sky condition at
CAA Cold air advection secondary location
CAPE Convective available not available
potential energy CHOP Turbulence type
CARIB Caribbean characterized by
rapid, rhythmic jolts
CAS Committee for
Aviation Services CHSPK Chesapeake
CASCDS Cascades CI Cirrus


CIG Ceiling CONT Continue
CIGS Ceilings CONTD Continued
CIN Convective inhibition CONTLY Continually
CLD Cloud CONTG Continuing
CLDNS Cloudiness CONTRAILS Condensation trails
CLDS Clouds CONTS Continues
CLKWS Clockwise CONTDVD Continental Divide
CLR Clear CONUS Continental U.S.
CLRG Clearing COORD Coordinate
CLRS Clears COR Correction
Wx Abbreviations
CMPLX Complex CPBL Capable

Appendix B
CNCL Cancel CPC Climate Prediction

CNCLD Canceled Center
CNCLG Canceling CRC Circle
CNCLS Cancels CRCLC Circulate
CNDN Canadian CRCLN Circulation
CNTR Center CRLC Circulate
CNTRD Centered CRLN Circulation
CNTRLN Centerline CRNR Corner
CNTRS Centers CRNRS Corners
CNTRL Central CRS Course
CNTY County CS Cirrostratus
CNTYS Counties CSDR Consider
CNVG Converge CSDRBL Considerable
CNVGG Converging CST Coast
CNVGNC Convergence CSTL Coastal
CNVTN Convection CT Connecticut
CNVTV Convective CTC Contact
CNVTVLY Convectively CTGY Category
CONFDC Confidence CTSKLS Catskills
CO Colorado CU Cumulus
COMPAR Compare CUFRA Cumulus fractus
COMPARG Comparing CVR Cover
COMPARD Compared CVRD Covered
COMPARS Compares CVRG Covering
COMPR Compare CVRS Covers
COMPRG Comparing CWSU Center Weather
Service Units
COMPRD Compared
CYC Cyclonic
COMPRS Compares
CYCLGN Cyclogenesis
COND Condition
DABRK Daybreak
CONS Continuous


DALGT Daylight DMSHD Diminished
DBL Double DMSHG Diminishing
DC District of Columbia DMSHS Diminishes
DCR Decrease DNDFTS Downdrafts
DCRD Decreased DNS Dense
DCRG Decreasing DNSLP Downslope
DCRGLY Decreasingly DNSTRM Downstream
DCRS Decreases DNWND Downwind
DE Delaware DP Deep
DEG Degree DPND Deepened
Wx Abbreviations
DEGS Degrees DPNG Deepening
Appendix B
DELMARVA Delaware-Maryland- DPNS Deepens
Virginia DPR Deeper
DFCLT Difficult DPTH Depth
DFCLTY Difficulty DR Low Drifting
DFNT Definite (descriptor used
DFNTLY Definitely with DU, SA or SN
DFRS Differs DRDU Drifting dust
DFUS Diffuse DRFT Drift
DGNL Diagonal DRFTD Drifted
DGNLLY Diagonally DRFTG Drifting
DIGG Digging DRFTS Drifts
DIR Direction DRSA Low drifting sand
DISC Discontinue DRSN Low drifting snow
DISCD Discontinued DRZL Drizzle
DISCG Discontinuing DS Duststorm
DISRE Disregard DSCNT Descent
DISRED Disregarded DSIPT Dissipate
DISREG Disregarding DSIPTD Dissipated
DKTS Dakotas DSIPTG Dissipating
DLA Delay DSIPTN Dissipation
DLAD Delayed DSIPTS Dissipates
DLT Delete DSND Descend
DLTD Deleted DSNDG Descending
DLTG Deleting DSNDS Descends
DLY Daily DSNT Distant
DMG Damage DSTBLZ Destabilize
DMGD Damaged DSTBLZD Destabilized
DMGG Damaging DSTBLZG Destabilizing
DMNT Dominant DSTBLZS Destabilizes
DMSH Diminish DSTBLZN Destabilization


DSTC Distance ENELY East-northeasterly
DTRT Deteriorate ENERN East-northeastern
DTRTD Deteriorated ENEWD East-northeastward
DTRTG Deteriorating ENHNC Enhance
DTRTS Deteriorates ENHNCD Enhanced
DU Widespread dust ENHNCG Enhancing
storm ENHNCS Enhances
DURC During climb ENHNCMNT Enhancement
DURD During descent ENRT Enroute
DURG During ENTR Entire
Wx Abbreviations
DURGC During climb ERN Eastern

Appendix B
DURGD During descent ERY Early

DURN Duration ERYR Earlier
DVLP Develop ESE East-southeast
DVLPD Developed ESELY East-southeasterly
DVLPG Developing ESERN East-southeastern
DVLPMT Development ESEWD East-southeastward
DVLPS Develops ESNTL Essential
DVRG Diverge ESTAB Establish
DVRGG Diverging EST Estimate
DVRGNC Divergence ESTS Estimates
DVRGS Diverges ETA Estimated time of
DVV Downward vertical arrival or ETA
velocity model
DWNDFTS Downdrafts ETC Et cetera
DWPNT Dew point ETIM Elapsed time
DWPNTS Dew points EVE Evening
DX Duplex EWD Eastward
DZ Drizzle (METAR) EXCLV Exclusive
E East EXCLVLY Exclusively
EBND Eastbound EXCP Except
EFCT Effect EXPC Expect
ELNGT Elongate EXPCD Expected
ELNGTD Elongated EXPCG Expecting
ELSW Elsewhere EXTD Extend
EMBD Embedded EXTDD Extended
EMBDD Embedded EXTDG Extending
EMERG Emergency EXTDS Extends
ENCTR Encounter EXTN Extension
ENDG Ending EXTRAP Extrapolate
ENE East-northeast EXTRAPD Extrapolated


EXTRM Extreme FLWG Following
EXTRMLY Extremely FM From
EXTSV Extensive FMGGgg From the time (UTC)
F Fahrenheit indicated by GGgg.
Generic WMO format
FA Aviation area fore- code group, indi-
cast cating a significant
FAH Fahrenheit and rapid (in less
than 1 hour) change
FAM Familiar to a new set of
FC Funnel cloud prevailing conditions
(+FC = Tornado or FMT Format
water spout)
Wx Abbreviations
FNCTN Function
FCST Forecast
Appendix B
FNT Front
FCSTD Forecasted
FNTL Frontal
FCSTG Forecasting
FNTS Fronts
FCSTR Forecaster
FNTGNS Frontogenesis
FCSTS Forecasts
FNTLYS Frontolysis
FEW Few (used to
describe cloud FORNN Forenoon
cover or weather FPM Feet per minute
phenomena, >0
octas to 2 octas FQT Frequent
cloud amount) FQTLY Frequently
FG Fog (METAR, only FRM Form
when visibility is FRMG Forming
less than 5/8 mile)
FRMN Formation
FIBI Filed but impracti-
cable to transmit FROPA Frontal passage
FIG Figure FROSFC Frontal surface
FILG Filling FRQ Frequent
FIR Flight information FRST Frost
region FRWF Forecast wind factor
FIRAV First available FRZ Freeze
FIS Flight Information FRZLVL Freezing level
Service
FRZN Frozen
FIS-B Flight Information
Service - Broadcast FRZG Freezing
FIRST First observation FT Feet or
after a break in cov- Terminal Forecast
erage at manual FTHR Further
station FU Smoke
FL Florida or flight level FV Flight visibility
FLG Falling FVRBL Favorable
FLRY Flurry FWD Forward
FLRYS Flurries FYI For your information
FLT Flight FZ Freezing
FLW Follow


FZRANO Freezing rain HDSVLY Hudson Valley
sensor not available HDWND Head wind
G Gust HGT Height
GA Georgia HI High or Hawaii
GEN General HIER Higher
GENLY Generally HIFOR High level forecast
GEO Geographic HLF Half
GEOREF Geographical refer- HLTP Hilltop
ence
HLSTO Hailstones
GF Fog
HLYR Haze layer
GICG Glaze icing
Wx Abbreviations
HND Hundred
GLFALSK Gulf of Alaska
Appendix B
HPC Hydrometeorological
GLFCAL Gulf of California Prediction Center
GLFMEX Gulf of Mexico HR Hour
GLFSTLAWR Gulf of St. HRS Hours
Lawrence
HRZN Horizon
GND Ground
HTG Heating
GNDFG Ground fog
HURCN Hurricane
GOES Geostationary
Operational HUREP Hurricane report
Environmental HV Have
Satellite
HVY Heavy
GR Hail (greater than
1/4 inch in diam- HVYR Heavier
eter) HVYST Heaviest
GRAD Gradient HWVR However
GRDL Gradual HWY Highway
GRDLY Gradually HZ Haze
GRT Great IA Iowa
GRTLY Greatly IC Ice crystals or ice
GRTR Greater ICAO International Civil
GRTST Greatest Aviation
Organization
GRTLKS Great Lakes
ICG Icing
GS Small hail or snow
pellets (smaller than ICGIC Icing in clouds
1/4 inch in diameter) ICGICIP Icing in clouds and
GSTS Gusts in precipitation
GSTY Gusty ICGIP Icing in precipitation
GTS Global Telecommuni- ID Idaho
cation System IFR Instrument flight
GV Ground visibility rules
HAZ Hazard IL Illinois
HCVIS High clouds visible IMC Instrument meteo-
rolgical conditions
HDFRZ Hard freeze
IMDT Immediate


IMDTLY Immediately IP Ice pellets
IMPL Impulse IPV Improve
IMPLS Impulses IPVG Improving
IMPT Important IR Infrared
INCL Include ISOL Isolate
INCLD Included ISOLD Isolated
INCLG Including JCTN Junction
INCLS Includes JTSTR Jet stream
INCR Increase KFRST Killing frost
INCRD Increased KLYR Smoke layer aloft
Wx Abbreviations
INCRG Increasing KOCTY Smoke over city
Appendix B
INCRGLY Increasingly KS Kansas
INCRS Increases KT Knots
INDC Indicate KY Kentucky
INDCD Indicated L Left
INDCG Indicating LA Louisiana
INDCS Indicates LABRDR Labrador
INDEF Indefinite LAPS Local Analysis and
INFO Information Prediction System
INLD Inland LAMP Local AWIPS MOS
Program
INSTBY Instability
LAST Last observation
INTCNTL Intercontinental before a break in
INTER Intermittent coverage at a
manual station
INTL International
LAT Latitude
INTMD Intermediate
LAWRS Limited aviation
INTMT Intermittent weather reporting
INTMTLY Intermittently station
INTR Interior LCL Local or Lifted
INTRMTRGN Intermountain condensation level
region LCLY Locally
INTS Intense LCTD Located
INTSFCN Intensification LCTN Location
INTSFY Intensify LCTMP Little change in tem-
INTSFYD Intensified perature
INTSFYG Intensifying LDG Landing
INTSFYS Intensifies LEVEL Level
INTSTY Intensity LFM Limited fine mesh
model
INTVL Interval
LFTG Lifting
INVRN Inversion
LGRNG Long-range
IOVC In overcast
LGT Light
INVOF In vicinity of
LGTR Lighter


LGWV Long wave LTST Latest
LI Lifted Index LV Leaving
LIFR Low instrument LVL Level
flight rules LVLS Levels
LIS Lifted Indices LWR Lower
LK Lake LWRD Lowered
LKS Lakes LWRG Lowering
LKLY Likely LYR Layer
LLJ Low level jet LYRD Layered
LLWAS Low-level wind LYRS Layers
shear alert system
Wx Abbreviations
M Minus or Less than

LLWS Low-level wind
Appendix B
lowest sensor value

shear
MA Massachusetts
LMTD Limited
MAN Manitoba
LMTG Limiting
MAX Maximum
LMTS Limits
MB Millibars
LN Line
MCD Mesoscale discus-
LNS LInes sion
LO Low MD Maryland
LONG Longitude MDFY Modify
LONGL Longitudinal MDFYD Modified
LRG Large MDFYG Modifying
LRGLY Largely MDL Model
LRGR Larger MDLS Models
LRGST Largest MDT Moderate
LST Local standard time MDTLY Moderately
LTD Limited ME Maine
LTG Lightning MED Medium
LTGCA Lightning cloud-to- MEGG Merging
air
MESO Mesoscale
LTGCC Lightning cloud-to-
cloud MET Meteorological
LTGCG Lightning cloud-to- METAR Aviation Routine
ground Weather Report
LTGCCCG Lightning cloud-to- METRO Metropolitan
cloud cloud-to- MEX Mexico
ground
MHKVLY Mohawk Valley
LTGCW Lightning cloud-to-
water MI Michigan , shallow,
or mile
LTGIC Lightning in cloud
MID Middle
LTL Little
MIDN Midnight
LTLCG Little change
MIL Military
LTR Later
MIN Minimum


MIFG Shallow fog NAB Not above
MISG Missing NAT North Atlantic
MLTLVL Melting level NATL National
MN Minnesota NAV Navigation
MNLD Mainland NAVAID Electronic naviga-
MNLY Mainly tion aid facility (lim-
ited to VOR or
MO Missouri VORTAC for
MOD Moderate PIREPs)
MOGR Moderate or greater NB New Brunswick
MOS Model Output NBND Northbound
Wx Abbreviations
Statistics NBRHD Neighborhood
Appendix B
MOV Move NC North Carolina
MOVD Moved NCDC National Climatic
MOVG Moving Data Center
MOVMT Movement NCEP National Center of
Environmental
MOVS Moves Prediction
MPH Miles per hour NCO NCEP Central
MRGL Marginal Operations
MRGLLY Marginally NCWX No change in
MRNG Morning weather
MRTM Maritime ND North Dakota
MS Mississippi NE Northeast
MSG Message NEB Nebraska
MSL Mean sea level NEC Necessary
MST Most NEG Negative
MSTLY Mostly NEGLY Negatively
MSTR Moisture NELY Northeasterly
MT Montana NERN Northeastern
MTN Mountain NEWD Northeastward
MTNS Mountains NEW ENG New England
MULT Multiple NFLD Newfoundland
MULTILVL Multilevel NGM Nested grid model
MVFR Marginal visual NGT Night
flight rules NH New Hampshire
MWO Meteorological NHC National Hurricane
Watch Office Center
MX Mixed (character- NIL None
ized as a combina- NJ New Jersey
tion of clear and
rime ice NL No layers
MXD Mixed NLT Not later than
N North NLY Northerly
N/A Not applicable NM New Mexico


NMBR Number NWS National Weather
NMBRS Numbers Service
NMC National NY New York
Meteorological NXT Next
Center OAT Outside air temper -
NML Normal ature
NMRS Numerous OBND Outbound
NNE North-northeast OBS Observation
NNELY North-northeasterly OBSC Obscure
NNERN North-northeastern OBSCD Obscured
NNEWD North-northeast- OBSCG Obscuring
Wx Abbreviations
ward OCFNT Occluded front

Appendix B
NNW North-northwest OCLD Occlude

NNWLY North-northwesterly OCLDS Occludes
NNWRN North-northwestern OCLDD Occluded
NNWWD North-northwest- OCLDG Occluding
ward
OCLN Occlusion
NNNN End of message
OCNL Occasional
NOAA National Oceanic
and Atmospheric OCNLY Occasionally
Administration OCR Occur
NOPAC Northern Pacific OCRD Occurred
NOS National Ocean OCRG Occurring
Service
OCRS Occurs
NOSPECI No SPECI reports
are taken at station OFC Office
NPRS Nonpersistent OFCM Office of the
Federal Coordinator
NR Near for Meteorology
NRLY Nearly OFP Occluded frontal
NRN Northern passage
NRW Narrow OFSHR Offshore
NS Nova Scotia OH Ohio
NSC No significant cloud OHD Overhead
NSW No significant OK Oklahoma
weather OMTNS Over mountains
NTFY Notify ONSHR On shore
NTFYD Notified OR Oregon
NV Nevada ORGPHC Orographic
NVA Negative vorticity ORIG Original
advection
OSV Ocean station
NW Northwest vessel
NWD Northward OTLK Outlook
NWLY Northwesterly OTP On top
NWRN Northwestern OTR Other


OTRW Otherwise PNO Precipitation amount
OUTFLO Outflow not available
OV Over PO Dust/ sand swirls
OVC Overcast POS Positive
OVHD Overhead POSLY Positively
OVNGT Overnight PPINA Radar weather
report not available
OVR Over
PPINE Radar weather
OVRN Overrun report no echoes
OVRNG Overrunning observed
OVTK Overtake PPSN Present position
Wx Abbreviations
OVTKG Overtaking PR Partial
Appendix B
OVTKS Overtakes PRBL Probable
P Higher than greatest PRBLY Probably
sensor value PRBLTY Probability
P6SM Visibility forecast to PRECD Precede
be greater than 6
statute miles PRECDD Preceded
PA Pennsylvania PRECDG Preceding
PAC Pacific PRECDS Precedes
PATWAS Pilot's automatic PRES Pressure
telephone weather PRESFR Pressure falling
answering service rapidly
PBL Planetary boundary PRESRR Pressure rising
layer rapidly
PCPN Precipitation PRFG Partial fog
PD Period PRIM Primary
PDS Periods PRIN Principal
PDMT Predominant PRIND Present indications
PE Ice pellets are...
PEN Peninsula PRJMP Pressure jump
PERM Permanent PROB Probability
PGTSND Puget Sound PROBC C Forecaster’s
assessment of the
PHYS Physical probability of occur-
PIBAL Pilot balloon obser- rence of a thunder-
vation storm or precipita-
tion event, along
PIREP Pilot weather report with associated
PK WND Peak wind weather elements
PL Ice pellets (wind, visibility,
and/or sky condi-
PLNS Plains tion) whose occur-
PLS Please rences are directly
PLTO Plateau related to, and con-
temporaneous with,
PM Postmeridian the thunderstorm or
PNHDL Panhandle precipitation event


PROC Procedure PY Spray
PROD Produce QN Question
PRODG Producing QPFERD NCEP excessive
PROG Forecast rainfall discussion
PROGD Forecasted QPFHSD NCEP heavy snow
discussion
PROGS Forecasts
QPFSPD NCEP special
PRSNT Present precipitation discus-
PRSNTLY Presently sion
PRST Persist QSTNRY Quasistationary
PRSTS Persists QTR Quarter
Wx Abbreviations
PRSTNC Persistence QUAD Quadrant

Appendix B
PRSTNT Persistent QUE Quebec

PRVD Provide R Right (with reference
to runway designa-
PRVDD Provided tion) or rain
PRVDG Providing RA Rain (METAR)
PRVDS Provides RADAT Radiosonde addi-
PS Plus tional data
PSBL Possible RAOB Radiosonde obser-
PSBLY Possibly vation
PSBLTY Possibility RCA Reach Cruising
Altitude
PSG Passage
RCH Reach
PSN Position
RCHD Reached
PSND Positioned
RCHG Reaching
PTCHY Patchy
RCHS Reaches
PTLY Partly
RCKY Rocky
PTNL Potential
RCKYS Rockies
PTNLY Potentially
RCMD Recommend
PTNS Portions
RCMDD Recommended
PUGET Puget Sound
RCMDG Recommending
PVA Positive vorticity
advection RCMDS Recommends
PVL Prevail RCRD Record
PVLD Prevailed RCRDS Records
PVLG Prevailing RCV Receive
PVLS Prevails RCVD Received
PVLT Prevalent RCVG Receiving
PWB Pilot weather RCVS Receives
briefing RDC Reduce
PWINO Precipitation identi- RDGG Ridging
fier sensor not avail- RDR Radar
able
RDVLP Redevelop
PWR Power


RDVLPG Redeveloping ROTD Rotated
RDVLPMT Redevelopment ROTG Rotating
RE Regard ROTS Rotates
RECON Reconnaissance RPD Rapid
REF Reference RPDLY Rapidly
RES Reserve RPLC Replace
REPL Replace RPLCD Replaced
REPLD Replaced RPLCG Replacing
REPLG Replacing RPLCS Replaces
REPLS Replaces RPRT Report
Wx Abbreviations
REQ Request RPRTD Reported
Appendix B
REQS Requests RPRTG Reporting
REQSTD Requested RPRTS Reports
RESP Response RPT Repeat
RESTR Restrict RPTG Repeating
RGD Ragged RPTS Repeats
RGL Regional model RQR Require
RGLR Regular RQRD Required
RGN Region RQRG Requiring
RGNS Regions RQRS Requires
RGT Right RRx Code used in the
RH Relative humidity WMO abbreviated
heading to indicate
RHINO RHI not operative a delayed forecast,
RI Rhode Island where x is the letter
A through X
RIME Type of icing char-
acterized by a rough, RS Receiver station
milky, opaque RSG Rising
appearance
RSN Reason
RIOGD Rio Grande
RSNG Reasoning
RLBL Reliable
RSNS Reasons
RLTV Relative
RSTR Restrict
RLTVLY Relatively
RSTRD Restricted
RM Remarks
RSTRG Restricting
RMK Remark
RSTRS Restricts
RMN Remain
RTRN Return
RMND Remained
RTRND Returned
RMNDR Remainder
RTRNG Returning
RMNG Remaining
RTRNS Returns
RMNS Remains
RUC Rapid Update Cycle
RNFL Rainfall
RUF Rough
RNG Range
RUFLY Roughly
ROT Rotate


RVR Runway Visual SEV Severe
Range SEWD Southeastward
RVRNO RVR system not SFC Surface
available
SFERICS Atmospherics
RVS Revise
SG Snow grains
RVSD Revised
SGFNT Significant
RVSG Revising
SGFNTLY Significantly
RVSS Revises
SH Showers
RW Rain shower
SHFT Shift
RWY Runway
SHFTD Shifted
RY Runway
Wx Abbreviations
SHFTG Shifting
S South
Appendix B
SHFTS Shifts
SA Sand (METAR)
SHLD Shield
SAB Satellite Analysis
Branch SHLW Shallow
SAO Surface observation SHRT Short
SASK Saskatchewan SHRTLY Shortly
SATFY Satisfactory SHRTWV Shortwave
SBND Southbound SHUD Should
SBSD Subside SHWR Shower
SBSDD Subsided SIERNEV Sierra Nevada
SBSDNC Subsidence SIG Signature
SBSDS Subsides SIGMET Significant meteoro-
logical information
SC South Carolina or
stratocumulus SIMUL Simultaneous
SCND Second SK Sky cover
SCNDRY Secondary SKC Sky clear
SCSL Stratocumulus SKED Schedule
standing lenticular SLD Solid
SCT Scatter or Scattered SLGT Slight
(describing cloud
cover or weather SLGTLY Slightly
phenomena, 3 to 4 SLO Slow
octas cloud amount SLOLY Slowly
SCTD Scattered SLOR Slower
SCTR Sector SLP Slope or sea level
SD South Dakota pressure
SE Southeast SLPG Sloping
SEC Second SLPNO Sea-level pressure
SELY Southeasterly not available
SEPN Separation SLT Sleet
SEQ Sequence SLW Slow
SERN Southeastern SLY Southerly
SM Statute mile


SMK Smoke SRND Surround
SML Small SRNDD Surrounded
SMLR Smaller SRNDG Surrounding
SMRY Summary SRNDS Surrounds
SMS Sunchronous mete- SS Sunset or sand
orological satellite storm (METAR)
SMTH Smooth SSE South-southeast
SMTHR Smoother SSELY South-southeasterly
SMTHST Smoothest SSERN South-southeastern
SMTM Sometime SSEWD South-southeastward
Wx Abbreviations
SMWHT Somewhat SSW South-southwest
Appendix B
SN Snow SSWLY South-southwesterly
SNBNK Snowbank SSWRN South-southwestern
SND Sand SSWWD South-southwest-
SNFLK Snowflake ward
SNGL Single ST Stratus
SNOINCR Snow increase STAGN Stagnation
SNOINCRG Snow increasing STBL Stable
SNST Sunset STBLTY Stability
SNW Snow STD Standard
SNWFL Snowfall STDY Steady
SOP Standard operating STFR Stratus fractus
procedure STFRM Stratiform
SP Snow pellets STG Strong
SPC Storm Prediction STGLY Strongly
Center STGR Stronger
SPCLY Especially STGST Strongest
SPD Speed STLT Satellite
SPECI Special observation STM Storm
SPENES Satellite precip. STMS Storms
estimate statement
STN Station
SPKL Sprinkle
STNRY Stationary
SPLNS Southern Plains
SUB Substitute
SPRD Spread
SUBTRPCL Subtropical
SPRDG Spreading
SUF Sufficient
SPRDS Spreads
SUFLY Sufficiently
SPRL Spiral
SUG Suggest
SQ Squall
SUGG Suggesting
SQAL Squall
SUGS Suggests
SQLN Squall line
SUP Supply
SR Sunrise
SUPG Supplying
SRN Southern


SUPR Superior THKNS Thickness
SUPSD Supersede THKR Thicker
SUPSDG Superseding THKST Thickest
SUPSDS Supersedes THN Thin
SVG Serving THNG Thinning
SVR Severe THNR Thinner
SVRL Several THNST Thinnest
SW Southwest THR Threshold
SW- Light snow shower THRFTR Thereafter
SW+ Heavy snow shower THRU Through
Wx Abbreviations
SWD Southward THRUT Throughout

Appendix B
SWLG Swelling THSD Thousand

SWLY Southwesterly THTN Threaten
SWODY1 SPC Severe THTND Threatened
Weather Outlook for THTNG Threatening
Day 1
THTNS Threatens
SWOMCD SPC Mesoscale
discussion TIL Until
SWRN Southwestern TKOF Takeoff
SWWD Southwestward TM Time
SX Stability index TMPRY Temporary
SXN Section TMPRYLY Temporarily
SYNOP Synoptic TMW Tomorrow
SYNS Synopsis TN Tennessee
SYS System TNDCY Tendency
T Thunder TNDCYS Tendencies
TA Temperature TNGT Tonight
TACAN UHF Tactical Air TNTV Tentative
Navigation Aid TNTVLY Tentatively
TAF Terminal Area TOC Top of Climb
Forecast
TOP Top of Clouds
TB Turbulence
TOPS Tops
TCNTL Transcontinental
TOVC Top of overcast
TCU Towering cumulus
TP Type of aircraft
TDA Today
TPG Topping
TEI Text element indi-
cator TRBL Trouble
TEMP Temperature TRIB Tributary
TEMPO Temporary TRKG Tracking
THD Thunderhead TRML Terminal
THDR Thunder TRMT Terminate
THK Thick TRMTD Terminated
THKNG Thickening TRMTG Terminating


TRMTS Terminates UNAVBL Unavailable
TRNSP Transport UNEC Unnecessary
TRNSPG Transporting UNKN Unknown
TROF Trough UNL Unlimited
TROFS Troughs UNRELBL Unreliable
TROP Tropopause UNRSTD Unrestricted
TRPCD Tropical continental UNSATFY Unsatisfactory
air mass UNSBL Unseasonable
TRPCL Tropical UNSTBL Unstable
TRRN Terrain UNSTDY Unsteady
Wx Abbreviations
TRSN Transition UNSTL Unsettle
Appendix B
TRW Thunderstorm UNSTLD Unsettled
TRW+ Thunderstorm with UNUSBL Unusable
heavy rain shower
UP Unknown precipita-
TS Thunderstorm tion (used only by
(METAR) automated sites
TS + Thunderstorm with incapable of discrimi-
heavy snow nation)
TSFR Transfer UPDFTS Updrafts
TSFRD Transferred UPR Upper
TSFRG Transferring UPSLP Upslope
TSFRS Transfers UPSTRM Upstream
TSHWR Thundershower URG Urgent
TSNO Thunderstorm infor- USBL Usable
mation not available UT Utah
TSNT Transient UTC Universal Time
TSQLS Thundersquall Coordinate
TSTM Thunderstorm UUA Urgent PIREP
TSW Thunderstorm with Weather Reports
snow showers UVV Upward vertical
TSW+ Thunderstorm with velocity
heavy snow showers UWNDS Upper winds
TURBC Turbulence V Varies
TURBT Turbulent VA Virginia or Volcanic
TWD Toward Ash
TWDS Towards VAAC Volcanic Ash
Advisory Center
TWI Twilight
VAAS Volcanic Ash
TWR Tower Advisory Statement
TWRG Towering VAD Velocity azimuth
TX Texas display
UA Pilot weather reports VAL Valley
UDDF Up- and downdrafts VARN Variation
UN Unable VC Vicinity


VCNTY Vicinity VSBYIR Visibility increasing
VCOT VFR conditions on rapidly
top VT Vermont
VCTR Vector VV Vertical velocity or
VCTS Thunderstorms in vertical visibility
the vicinity VWP VAD Wind profiler
VDUC VAS Data Utilization W West
Center (NSSFC) WA Washington
VFR Visual flight rules WAA Warm air advection
VFY Verify WAFS Word Area Forecast
VFYD Verified System
Wx Abbreviations
VFYG Verifying WBND Westbound

Appendix B
VFYS Verifies WDLY Widely

VHF Very High Frequency WDSPRD Widespread
VIS Visibility WEA Weather
VSNO Visibility at second- WFO Weather Forecast
ary location not avail- Office
able WFSO Weather Forecast
VLCTY Velocity Service Office
VLCTYS Velocities WFP Warm front passage
VLNT Violent WI Wisconsin
VLNTLY Violently WIBIS Will be issued
VLY Valley WINT Winter
VMC Visual meteorolog- WK Weak
ical conditions WKDAY Weekday
VOL Volume WKEND Weekend
VOR VHF WKNG Weakening
Omnidirectional
Radio Range WKNS Weakens
VORT Vorticity WKR Weaker
VORTAC VOR and TACAN WKST Weakest
combination WKN Weaken
VR Veer WL Will
VRB Variable WLY Westerly
VRG Veering WMO World Meteorological
VRBL Variable Organization
VRISL Vancouver Island,BC WND Wind
VRS Veers WNDS Winds
VRT MOTN Vertical motion WNW West-northwest
VRY Very WNWLY West-northwesterly
VSB Visible WNWRN West-northwestern
VSBY Visibility WNWWD West-northwest-
ward
VSBYDR Visibility decreasing
rapidly WO Without


WPLTO Western Plateau XTNDD Extended
WRM Warm XTNDG Extending
WRMG Warming XTRM Extreme
WRMR Warmer XTRMLY Extremely
WRMST Warmest YDA Yesterday
WRMFNT Warm front YKN Yukon
WRMFNTL Warm frontal YLSTN Yellowstone
WRN Western Z Zulu time
WRNG Warning ZL Freezing drizzle
WRS Worse ZN Zone
Wx Abbreviations
WS Wind shear ZNS Zones
Appendix B
WSHFT Windshift ZR Freezing rain
WSFO Weather Service
Forecast Office
WSO Weather service
office
WSR-88D NWS Doppler
Radar
WSTCH Wasatch Range
WSW West-southwest
WSWLY West-southwesterly
WSWRN West-southwestern
WSWWD West-southwest-
ward
WTR Water
WTSPT Waterspout
WUD Would
WV West Virginia or wind
WVS Waves
WW Severe weather
watch
WWD Westward
WWS Severe weather
watches
WX Weather
WY Wyoming
XCP Except
XPC Expect
XPCD Expected
XPCG Expecting
XPCS Expects
XPLOS Explosive
XTND Extend

Wx Abbreviations Common Weather Abbreviations

Appendix B

Appendix C 4/29/04 1:21 PM Page C-1
GPS Primer
APPENDIX C
GPS PRIMER
BACKGROUND
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation
system that was originally conceived and implemented by the United
States Department of Defense (DoD). The system is, however, available
to all civilian users free of charge. GPS provides extremely precise posi-
tion, velocity, and time information.
The satellites are not geosynchronous, as is the case with many weather
and television satellites. That is, each satellite is not above a fixed spot
on the Earth all the time, but rather is continuously moving across the
sky. In fact, each satellite completely orbits the Earth two times per day.
The Department of Defense has the capability to impose an intentional
accuracy degradation of the GPS system. This degradation is known as
Selective Availability (SA). When SA is active, only U.S. military users
have access to full GPS accuracy. For civilian users, position accuracy
is degraded to no worse than 100 meters 95% of the time. At the time of
this writing, Selective Availability has been turned off by the DOD but it
Appendix C
GPS Primer
could be turned back on at another time .
GPS POSITION DETERMINING CONCEPT

The technique used to determine position is fundamentally very simple.
The complicated part is accounting for and correcting all the possible
errors in the position.
The GPS receiver is able to determine the time it takes a radio signal to
travel from the satellite to the GPS antenna. Since this radio signal
travels at the speed of light (approximately 186,000 statute miles per
second), the time delay can very easily be used to determine the
receiver’s distance from a given satellite. If measurements are taken
from four satellites (or three satellites and an input from an aircraft
altimeter), the receiver can identify its position very precisely.
For example, the GPS receiver might determine that it is exactly 12,000
miles from satellite A, 12,700 miles from satellite B, and 13,100 miles
from satellite C. At the same time, the aircraft’s encoding altimeter might
be indicating an altitude of 9,500 feet MSL. There is only one point in
space that satisfies these four measurements.
GPS DATA SIGNALS

Two of the primary types of signals that the GPS satellites broadcast are
almanac and ephemeris data. These signals enable the GPS receiver to
Rev 2 Apr/2004 C-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix C 4/29/04 1:21 PM Page C-2
GPS Primer
quickly lock on to the satellites in view. Otherwise, the receiver would
have to look for each of the 24 satellites to determine which ones could
be used.
Almanac data is very crude data which describes the approximate orbital
position of the satellites. Each of the 24 satellites transmits the almanac
data for all satellites, so a GPS receiver has only to listen to one satellite
in order to know which satellites are “visible” (in the sky) at that particular
time. Almanac data is good for about six months, so when you turn the
receiver off, then back on a month later, it will know what satellites to
look for.
Ephemeris data is very precise data which each satellite transmits to tell
the GPS receiver exactly where it is and what its orbital parameters will
be for about the next four hours. Each satellite transmits its own unique
ephemeris data.
GPS SYSTEM SEGMENTS

The GPS system is composed of three segments: the Space Segment,
the Control Segment, and the User Segment.
The Space Segment consists of the 24 NAVSTAR satellites which orbit
the earth at an altitude of 10,898 nautical miles. The satellite orbits are
Appendix C
GPS Primer
very precisely planned so that the entire surface of the earth may use the
GPS system 24 hours a day, every day. There are almost always more
than six satellites in view from anywhere on Earth.
The Control Segment consists of a network of ground-based monitoring
and control stations. The Master Control Station is located in Colorado
Springs, Colorado. All satellite data which is collected by the other
ground stations is assimilated and analyzed at Colorado Springs. Based
on these analyses, ephemeris updates (such as system clock correc-
tions) are sent (uplinked) to the satellites through radio transmitters at
the ground stations. These ground stations are located at Kwajalein
(west of Hawaii in the central Pacific Ocean), Diego Garcia (in the Indian
Ocean), and Ascension (in the south Atlantic Ocean).
As an owner of a GPS system, you can now claim to be a certified
member of the GPS User Segment! GPS has many users and uses,
and more are being dreamed up all the time. Not only are aircraft using
GPS navigation, so are military systems and personnel, boaters, hikers,
and surveyors. Personal automobiles and transport trucks use Intelligent
Transportation Systems, or ITS, to find their destinations, and track their
movements. Some biologists attach GPS receivers to animals to mon-
itor their movement and migration patterns. Geologists even use GPS to
track the movement of glaciers and to analyze plate tectonics (move-
ments of the Earth’s crust).
Rev 2 Apr/2004 C-2 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix D 4/29/04 1:22 PM Page D-1
Navigation Terms
APPENDIX D - NAVIGATION TERMS
BRG - Bearing to waypoint (degrees)
DA - Drift Angle (degrees) - (not displayed)
DIS - Distance to waypoint (nm)
DTK - Desired Track (degrees)
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute (hrs:min)
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
GS - Groundspeed (nm/hr)
HDG - Heading (degrees)
OBS - Selected Course
POS - Present position
TRK - Actual Track (degrees)
WPT - Waypoint
XTK - Cross Track Error Correction (nm) displayed as “FLY L 2.3 nm” on
CDI or HSI.
NORTH
WPT 2
TRK
BRG
DA
HDG
S
/G
DTK TA
E/E
IS/ET
D
POS
ON TRACK
Enroute-Leg Mode
NORTH
WIND
OBS
WPT 1
BRG
ACTIVE WPT
NORTH
GS
TA
/E
TE
/E
IS
D
Navigation Terms
DA
Appendix D
HDG
OFF TRACK
TRK Enroute-OBS Mode
XTK
POS
WPT 2
NORTH
WIND
GS
TA
/E
BRG
TE
/E
IS
DTK
D
DA
HDG
WPT 1
TRK OFF TRACK
Enroute Leg Mode
XTK
POS
WIND
Rev 2 Apr/2004 D-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Appendix D 4/29/04 1:22 PM Page D-2
Navigation Terms

Navigation Terms
Appendix D
Rev 2 Apr/2004 D-2 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Index
A
Absolute Altitude 1-18
Index
Absolute Terrain 1-18, 1-19
Absolute Terrain Color Key 1-18
Activate 1-3, 1-55, 1-56, 1-57, 1-64, 1-72
Activating a Stored Flight Plan 1-64
Active Flight Plan 1-33, 1-46, 1-53, 1-55, 1-59, 1-60, 1-64, 1-65, 1-72,
1-78
Add Subscriber 2-22
Aeronautical Data 1-34, 1-35, 1-95
Aged 2-14
Air Data Computer 1-29
AIRMET 2-8
Airplane Icon 1-20
Airport Filter 1-36
Airport Identifier 1-25, 1-35
Airport Info 1 of 2 1-25, 1-60
Airport Info 2 of 2 1-25, 1-60
Airport Info Field Definitions 1-27
Airport Information 1-25, 1-26, 1-27, 1-47
Airport Settings 1-81
Airspace Alert 1-29, 1-31, 1-32, 1-86
Airspace Interrogation 1-28
Alert Weather Watches 2-10
ALT 1-10
Altimeter 2-5, 2-61
Altimeter Setting 1-29
Altitude Encoder 1-29
Altitude Volume 3-4
Rev 3 Dec/2005 I-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-2
Index
AMR 1-87, 1-95
ATI 1-87, 1-95
Audio Mute 3-13
Index
Auto 1-23, 1-57, 1-85, 1-88

Auto Leg Sequencing 1-57, 1-59
Auto Zoom 1-23
Auto-Pop-Up 3-4, 3-7, 3-13, 3-15
AutoNav 1-84
Autopilot 1-39, 1-85
Aux Menu 1-22, 1-31, 1-42, 1-52, 1-84, 1-88, 1-89, 1-90, 1-97, 1-98,
2-21, 5-1, 5-2
Aux-Main Menu 5-2
Aux-Message 5-2
Aviation Icon Group 1-82
Aviation Line Group 1-82
B
Baro Altitude 1-8
Baro Correction 1-21, 1-22, 1-29
Baro Entry 1-22
Base Reflectivity 2-3, 2-11, 2-12, 2-13, 2-26, 2-27
Bearing 1-5, 1-10, 1-13, 1-24, 1-44, 1-45, 1-46, 1-56
BRG 1-10, 1-11
Brightness Control 1-3, 1-9
Buffer Altitude 1-30, 1-32
C
Calculator 1-78
Cartographic Data 1-95
Rev 2 Apr/2004 I-2 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Index
Caution, No Position Data 1-23
CDI 1-8, 1-10, 1-12, 1-57, 1-84
Cell Mode 4-3
Index
Change Area 2-48, 2-51, 2-55
Change Fields 1-11, 1-61, 1-79
Changing Demo Mode Settings 1-88
Changing the Data Columns 1-61
Changing the Name of the Flight Plan 1-69
Changing Weather Products 2-50
Choose Product 2-25, 2-48, 2-50
Closest Point of Approach 3-5, 3-14
Coast Mode 3-16
Cone of Silence 3-10, 3-11
Convective SIGMET 2-9
Copy 1-66
Course Deviation Indicator 1-8, 1-10, 1-12, 1-84
CPA 3-5, 3-6, 3-14
Creating a Flight Plan 1-62
Crosstrack Error 1-39
Current Nav Source 1-84
D
Data Areas 1-95
Data Columns 1-61, 1-78, 1-79
Data Field 1-5, 1-9, 1-11, 1-38, 1-85, 1-86, 3-7, 3-15, 3-16
Database Cycle Information 1-100
Database Information 1-100
Database Subscriptions 1-100
Database Versions 1-90

Index
Datacards 1-95
Date and Time of Issue 2-5, 2-7, 2-59, 2-62
Date and Time Valid 2-7, 2-62
Index
Declutter 1-34, 1-35

Deleting a Stored Flight Plan 1-70
Deleting a User Waypoint 1-53
Deleting a Waypoint in the Flight Plan 1-66
Demo Mode 1-5, 1-86, 1-87, 1-88
Dep Time 1-10
Dew Point 2-5, 2-61
Direct-To 1-37, 1-55, 1-56, 1-57
DIS 1-10, 1-61
Discharge Points 4-2, 4-4, 4-5
Display Flight Plan Data on Map 1-33
DTK 1-10, 1-38, 1-61
E
Edit WPT 1-52
Edit/Review 1-66
Editing a Stored Flight Plan 1-66
Editing a User Waypoint 1-52, 1-53
Electrical Discharge 4-4
Encoded 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9
Enroute Safe Altitude 1-13, 1-14
Entering A User Airport 1-46, 1-47
Entering a User Waypoint 1-41, 1-47, 1-52
ESA 1-10, 1-14, 1-61
ETA 1-10, 1-61, 1-79, 1-80
ETA WPT 1-10

Index
ETE 1-10, 1-61
ETE WPT 1-10
Expiration 2-3, 2-14, 2-20, 2-28, 2-51, 2-67, 2-69, 2-71
Index
Extended TRK 1-81
F
Fee-Based 2-2, 2-3, 2-19
FFLOW 1-79, 1-80
Fields Off 1-10, 1-11
Filter Area 2-48, 2-50, 2-51, 2-55
Find Nearest 1-4, 1-35, 1-37, 1-55
FIS 1-2, 1-25, 1-100
FIS Display ID 2-19, 2-21
FIS Graphics Page 2-25, 2-26, 2-27, 2-29, 2-30, 2-32, 2-33, 2-35, 2-36,
2-38, 2-39, 2-41, 2-42, 2-45
FIS Info 1-25
FIS Network Status Page 2-44, 2-45
FIS Notifications 2-27, 2-49, 2-57, 2-58
FIS Products 2-2, 2-20
FIS Receiver Failure 5-1
FIS Subscription 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-23
FIS Subscription Status Page 2-19, 2-20
FIS Text Page 2-3, 2-25, 2-49
Flight Information Services 2-1, 2-3
Flight Level 3-4, 3-13
Flight Plan Index 1-59, 1-62, 1-63, 1-64, 1-66, 1-68, 1-70, 1-80
Flight Plan Operation 1-59
Flight Plan Page 1-38, 1-59, 1-60, 1-62, 1-65, 1-78
Flight Planning 1-2, 1-15

Index
FLT Time 1-10
FPL 1-59, 1-62, 1-64, 1-66, 1-70
Freezing Level 2-16, 2-67, 2-69
Index
Freq 1-50
Fuel 1-61
Fuel Flow 1-61, 1-79
Function Select Key 1-3, 1-4, 1-9, 1-18
Function Status Icons 1-5, 1-6, 2-4, 4-1
G
GNDSPD 1-10, 1-79, 1-80
GPS Altitude 1-8, 1-21
GPS Receiver 1-15
Graphical AIRMET 2-16, 2-32
Graphical Alert Weather Watches 2-17
Graphical Convective SIGMET 2-17, 2-38
Graphical METAR 2-14, 2-29
Graphical SIGMET 2-16, 2-35
Graphical Weather Products 2-25, 2-27, 2-30, 2-33, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42,
2-45, 2-48, 2-50
Graphical Weather Watches 2-41
Great Circle 1-13
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude 1-13, 1-14
H
Heading 1-10, 1-23, 1-81, 1-87
Heading Stabilization 4-2
Heading Up 1-23, 1-81

Index
I
ICAO Station Identifier 2-5, 2-7, 2-15, 2-59, 2-62
Index
ICAO/WMO 2-2
Icing 2-8, 2-9, 2-65, 2-66, 2-68
Icons 1-91
IFR Map 1-18, 1-19
Insert After 1-68
Insert Before 1-68
Insert Present Position 1-79
Insert WPT 1-63
Inserting 1-67, 1-78, 1-96
Inserting a Waypoint in the Flight Plan 1-67
Intensity 2-6, 2-11, 2-13, 2-14, 2-65
Internal VFR GPS 1-1, 1-4, 1-84
Invert 1-65
J
Jeppesen 1-1, 1-13, 1-14, 1-29, 1-95, 1-100
Joystick 2-27, 2-30, 2-33, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42, 2-45, 2-48
K
Knob Scan 2-54, 2-56
L
Label 1-4, 1-5, 1-81, 1-96
Land Data 1-34, 1-35
Land Icon Group 1-82
Land Line Group 1-83

Index
Lat/Lon 1-85
Latitude 1-24, 1-44, 1-45, 1-46, 1-85
Leg 1-33, 1-38, 1-57, 1-59, 1-60, 1-61
Index
Leg Dis 1-61

Leg Fuel 1-61
Leg Mode 1-33, 1-59
Leg MSA 1-61
Leg Time 1-61
Legend 1-18, 1-20, 2-28, 2-31, 2-34, 2-37, 2-40, 2-43
Length 1-36, 1-44, 1-49, 1-81
Line 1-28, 1-33, 1-43, 1-44, 1-81, 1-82
Longitude 1-24, 1-44, 1-45, 1-46, 1-85
M
Magnetic Variation 1-13, 1-85
Map Data Interrogation 1-24
Map Display Icons 1-91
Map Orientation 3-7, 3-16
Map Settings Group 1 1-81
Map Setup 1-5, 1-6, 1-23, 1-28, 1-81, 1-83
Map Setup Overlays Group Page 1-5, 1-6
Map View 1-60
Menu 2-25, 4-2
Menu Key 1-84, 1-88, 1-89, 1-90, 1-97, 1-98, 3-4, 3-7, 3-13, 3-15, 5-1
Message 1-8, 1-31, 1-32, 1-86, 5-1, 5-3
Message Press Menu 1-31, 5-1
METAR 1-25, 2-5
Min Rwy Len 1-81
Minimum Safe Altitude 1-10, 1-13, 1-61

Index
MORA 1-13, 1-14
More Info 1-24, 1-25, 1-27, 1-28, 1-35, 1-60
Mountain Obscuration 2-8
Index
MSA 1-10, 1-13, 1-14, 1-61
Mute 3-13
N
Nav Data Settings 1-84, 1-85, 1-86
Navaid 1-27, 1-28, 1-45, 1-46
Navaid Information 1-27
Navigation Setup 1-10, 1-31, 1-38, 1-84
Near Position 1-10, 1-86
Nearest 1-3, 1-4, 1-35, 1-36, 1-37, 1-55
New FPL 1-62
New WPT 1-43
NEXRAD 2-11
NEXRAD Abnormalities 2-12
NEXRAD Limitations 2-13
Next DTK 1-38
Next Group 1-82, 1-83
No Data 2-14, 2-28
No Data Received from Stormscope® 4-2
No-Bearing 3-6
No-Cost 2-2
Non-Altitude Reporting 3-14, 3-17
North Pointer 1-23
North Up 1-23, 1-81
NRST 1-3, 1-4, 1-35

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-10
Index
O
OBS 1-14, 1-33, 1-56, 1-57, 1-75, 1-76, 1-77
Index
Obstacle Labels 1-22

Off-Scale 3-6, 3-14
Orientation 1-23, 1-25, 1-48, 1-81
OSGB 1-85
Overlay 1-2, 1-5, 1-33, 1-83
Overlays Group 1-5, 1-6, 1-81, 1-83
OVLY Setup 1-81, 1-83
P
PAI 1-87, 1-95
PBRG 1-24, 1-85
PDIS 1-24, 1-85
PIREP 2-7
Pop-Up 1-9
Position Format 1-85
Power-Down 1-9
Power-Up 1-7, 1-23, 1-87
PPOS 1-10, 1-79, 1-85
Present Position 1-10, 1-24, 1-33, 1-35, 1-37, 1-44, 1-45, 1-55, 1-78,
1-79, 1-81
PREV 1-20
Proximity Intruder 3-5, 3-14
Q
QuickTune™ 1-15, 1-26, 1-28, 1-29, 1-50, 1-60

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-11
Index
R
Radial 1-13
Index
Range Keys 1-4
Range Rings 1-81
Relative Terrain 1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-21
Relative Terrain and Obstacles 1-20
Relative Terrain Map 1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-21
Remarks 1-43, 1-44, 1-47, 2-5, 2-8, 2-61, 2-66
Required Fuel 1-78, 1-79
Reset Stick 1-18, 1-20, 1-24, 1-60, 1-68
Resolution Advisory 3-5, 3-6
Restart Demo 1-88
Restore Default 1-11, 1-61
Retrieve User Data 1-98
RNG 1-4, 1-23, 1-24, 1-25, 2-27, 2-30, 2-33, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42, 2-45, 2-48,
2-50, 3-4, 3-13, 4-4
Rotary Knob 2-27, 2-30, 2-33, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42, 2-45, 2-48
Runway Type 1-36
Runway Visibility 2-6
Runway Visual Range 2-5, 2-59
S
Save & Exit 1-46, 1-50
Sector Altitude 1-14
See Chart 1-29
Select WX Product 2-48, 2-50
Selecting a Map Display 1-18
Self Test 1-7
SIGMET 2-9
Signal Strength 1-15

Index
Significant Meteorological Information 2-9
Significant Weather 2-6, 2-8, 2-63
Sky Condition 2-5, 2-7, 2-61, 2-63
Index
Softkeys 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-20, 1-22, 1-59

Software Version 1-89
SPECI 2-6
Special Use Airspace 1-86
Standby 3-4
Startup Displays 1-7
Status Icon 1-5, 1-6
Store Current User Data 1-97
Stored Flight Plan 1-60, 1-62, 1-64, 1-66, 1-70
Stormscope® 1-2, 1-5, 1-7
Stormscope® Icons 4-1
Strategic Weather Planning 2-3
Strike Mode 4-3, 4-5
SUA 1-29, 1-30, 1-31, 1-32, 1-86
SUA Alerting 1-31, 1-32, 1-86
Subscription 1-90, 1-96, 1-100
Subscription Code 2-19, 2-22, 2-58
Subscription Service 2-2, 2-3, 2-5, 2-11, 2-20, 2-23
Sunrise 1-61
Sunset 1-61
Surface 1-25, 1-49, 1-51, 1-81
Surface Visibility 2-6
Symbol 1-1
System Faults 3-8, 3-17
System Message 5-1
System Setup 1-81
System Test 3-8
Rev 3 Dec/2005 I-12 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-13
Index
T
TAF 2-7
Index
Temperature 2-5, 2-8, 2-12, 2-61, 2-65
Temporarily Decluttering the Map 1-34
Test 3-4, 3-8
Text 1-23, 1-44, 1-82, 1-83
Textual Weather Products 2-25, 2-27, 2-30, 2-33, 2-36, 2-39, 2-42, 2-45,
2-47, 2-48
Time 1-10
Time Zone 1-85
TIS Limitations 3-10
TKE 1-10
Topological Data 1-95
Track Up 1-23, 1-81
Traffic 1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 1-10, 1-51, 1-83
Traffic Advisory 3-5, 3-6, 3-14, 3-15
Traffic Avoidance 1-5, 1-83
Traffic Display 3-1, 3-3, 3-4, 3-7, 3-12, 3-13, 3-15, 3-16
Traffic Function 3-1, 3-2, 3-6, 3-8, 3-15
Traffic Function Status Icons 3-2
Traffic Information Service 3-1, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15,
3-16, 3-17, 3-18
Transferring Data 1-97
TRFC 1-9, 1-10
Trip Planning Using Present Position 1-78
TRK 1-10, 1-81
Turbulence 2-8, 2-9, 2-65, 2-66, 2-67, 2-68, 2-69
Turn Anticipation 1-38, 1-39, 1-86
Turn Guidance 1-38, 1-86
Turn To 1-38, 1-39

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-14
Index
Type 1-28, 1-33, 1-36, 1-47, 1-49, 1-50, 1-51, 1-86, 1-87
Type of Report 2-5, 2-7, 2-59, 2-62
Index
U
Use Actual 1-80
Use Stick 1-60, 1-63, 1-68
User Airport 2 of 2 1-48
User Airport Edit 1-47, 1-48
User Defined Area Entry 2-52, 2-53, 2-55
User Waypoint 1-41, 1-42, 1-43, 1-44, 1-46, 1-47, 1-52, 1-53, 1-55, 1-56
User Waypoint Edit 1-41, 1-43, 1-44, 1-47, 1-52
User Waypoint List 1-42, 1-46, 1-52, 1-53
Using Direct-To in the Active Flight Plan 1-72
Using the Map 1-23
UTM 1-85
V
VDL 2-1, 2-2, 2-3
Vertical Buffer 1-30
VFR Map 1-18
VFR Map Display 1-6, 1-8
VHF Data Link 2-1
Viewing Flight Plan Data 1-60
Viewing System Messages 5-1
Viewing the Active Flight Plan 1-59
VOR Receiver 1-56

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-15
Index
W
Waypoint Alert 1-8, 1-38
Index
Waypoint Entry 1-45, 1-46, 1-55, 1-57, 1-62, 1-67
Waypoint Position 1-44
Weather Phenomena 2-5, 2-7, 2-10
Wind Shear 2-7, 2-16, 2-67
Wingman Services 2-19, 2-21, 2-23, 2-46
WPT 1-8, 1-10, 1-38, 1-43, 1-52, 1-53, 1-59, 1-63, 1-66, 1-86
WX 1-2, 1-5, 1-9
X
XTK 1-10, 1-39

Index 4/29/04 1:23 PM Page I-16
Index Index

Honeywell International Inc.
One Technology Center
23500 West 105th Street
Olathe, Kansas 66061
FAX 913-791-1302
Telephone: (913) 712-0400
Copyright ©2003-2005 Honeywell International Inc.

All rights reserved.
006-18281-0000
Revision 3 Dec/2005 N

Pilot's Guide KMD-250

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pilot's Guide KMD-250

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pilot's Guide KMD-250

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

N

Copyright © 2003-2005 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.

Software Version 01/08 or later

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 0, November 2003

Part Number 006-18281-0000

This is the original release of this publication.

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 1, November 2003

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Change in text on Startup Caution Page.

Revision History and Instructions

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 2, April 2004

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Manual KMD 250 Pilot’s Guide

Revision 3, December 2005

Part Number 006-18281-0000

Rev 2 Apr/2004 i KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

USING THE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Changing the Name of the Flight Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-69

Rev 2 Apr/2004 iii

NEXRAD Page Operational Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

UNDERSTANDING AVIATION WEATHER REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Rev 2 Apr/2004 vii

SWITCH BETWEEN DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

VIEWING SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

COMMON WEATHER ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

GPS Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

Rev 2 Apr/2004 viii

NAVIGATION TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Intentionally left blank

Rev 3 Dec/2005 1-1 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

• Terrain awareness display (Terrain color coded by relative altitude)

Appendix D Navigation Terms Definitions and examples of common navigation

Rev 2 Apr/2004 1-2 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 2 Apr/2004 1-3 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

MAP FPL WX TRFC

VFR Map Active FIS Graphical

DIRECT-TO/NRST (NEAREST) KEY

The Direct-To Key (D) is found on units containing the optional

Rev 2 Apr/2004 1-4 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

This is a pointing device which moves a mouse-like pointer around the

FUNCTION STATUS ICONS

Rev 2 Apr/2004 1-5 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

Rev 2 Apr/2004 1-6 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

After the completion of the Self Test,

Non-GPS KMD 250 KMD 250 with Internal GPS

Rev 3 Aug/2005 1-7 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide

on the instrument panel as shown

WPT. However, they are optional

Non-GPS KMD 250 KMD 250 with Internal GPS

Acknowledge the next caution page

The KMD 250 is now ready for use

Rev 3 Aug/2005 1-8 KMD 250 Pilot's Guide